e31b01a3d8b45c3cdc9934af6cca9f14bdc24cb3
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gdb / doc / gdb.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (c) 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c
4 @c %**start of header
5 @c makeinfo ignores cmds prev to setfilename, so its arg cannot make use
6 @c of @set vars. However, you can override filename with makeinfo -o.
7 @setfilename gdb.info
8 @c
9 @include gdb-cfg.texi
10 @c
11 @ifset GENERIC
12 @settitle Debugging with @value{GDBN}
13 @end ifset
14 @ifclear GENERIC
15 @settitle Debugging with @value{GDBN} (@value{TARGET})
16 @end ifclear
17 @setchapternewpage odd
18 @c %**end of header
19
20 @iftex
21 @c @smallbook
22 @c @cropmarks
23 @end iftex
24
25 @finalout
26 @syncodeindex ky cp
27
28 @c readline appendices use @vindex
29 @syncodeindex vr cp
30
31 @c ===> NOTE! <==
32 @c Determine the edition number in *three* places by hand:
33 @c 1. First ifinfo section 2. title page 3. top node
34 @c To find the locations, search for !!set
35
36 @c GDB CHANGELOG CONSULTED BETWEEN:
37 @c Fri Oct 11 23:27:06 1991 John Gilmore (gnu at cygnus.com)
38 @c Sat Dec 22 02:51:40 1990 John Gilmore (gnu at cygint)
39
40 @c THIS MANUAL REQUIRES TEXINFO-2 macros and info-makers to format properly.
41
42 @ifinfo
43 @c This is a dir.info fragment to support semi-automated addition of
44 @c manuals to an info tree. zoo@cygnus.com is developing this facility.
45 @format
46 START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47 * Gdb:: The GNU debugger.
48 END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
49 @end format
50 @end ifinfo
51 @c
52 @c
53 @ifinfo
54 This file documents the GNU debugger @value{GDBN}.
55
56 @c !!set edition, date, version
57 This is Edition 4.09, April 1993,
58 of @cite{Debugging with @value{GDBN}: the GNU Source-Level Debugger}
59 for GDB Version @value{GDBVN}.
60
61 Copyright (C) 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
62
63 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
64 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
65 are preserved on all copies.
66
67 @ignore
68 Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the
69 results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
70 notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
71 (this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).
72
73 @end ignore
74 Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
75 manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
76 entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
77 permission notice identical to this one.
78
79 Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
80 into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
81 @end ifinfo
82
83 @titlepage
84 @title Debugging with @value{GDBN}
85 @subtitle The GNU Source-Level Debugger
86 @ifclear GENERIC
87 @subtitle (@value{TARGET})
88 @end ifclear
89 @sp 1
90 @c !!set edition, date, version
91 @subtitle Edition 4.09, for @value{GDBN} version @value{GDBVN}
92 @subtitle April 1993
93 @author by Richard M. Stallman and Roland H. Pesch
94 @page
95 @tex
96 {\parskip=0pt
97 \hfill (Send bugs and comments on @value{GDBN} to bug-gdb\@prep.ai.mit.edu.)\par
98 \hfill {\it Debugging with @value{GDBN}}\par
99 \hfill \TeX{}info \texinfoversion\par
100 \hfill pesch\@cygnus.com\par
101 }
102 @end tex
103
104 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
105 Copyright @copyright{} 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
106
107 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
108 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
109 are preserved on all copies.
110
111 Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
112 manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
113 entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
114 permission notice identical to this one.
115
116 Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
117 into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
118 @end titlepage
119 @page
120
121 @ifinfo
122 @node Top
123 @top Debugging with @value{GDBN}
124
125 This file describes @value{GDBN}, the GNU symbolic debugger.
126
127 @c !!set edition, date, version
128 This is Edition 4.09, April 1993, for GDB Version @value{GDBVN}.
129
130 @menu
131 * Summary:: Summary of @value{GDBN}
132 @ifset NOVEL
133 * New Features:: New features since GDB version 3.5
134 @end ifset
135 @ifclear BARETARGET
136 * Sample Session:: A sample @value{GDBN} session
137 @end ifclear
138
139 * Invocation:: Getting in and out of @value{GDBN}
140 * Commands:: @value{GDBN} commands
141 * Running:: Running programs under @value{GDBN}
142 * Stopping:: Stopping and continuing
143 * Stack:: Examining the stack
144 * Source:: Examining source files
145 * Data:: Examining data
146 @ifclear CONLY
147 * Languages:: Using @value{GDBN} with different languages
148 @end ifclear
149 @ifset CONLY
150 * C:: C language support
151 @end ifset
152 @c remnant makeinfo bug, blank line needed after two end-ifs?
153
154 * Symbols:: Examining the symbol table
155 * Altering:: Altering execution
156 * GDB Files:: @value{GDBN} files
157 * Targets:: Specifying a debugging target
158 * Controlling GDB:: Controlling @value{GDBN}
159 * Sequences:: Canned sequences of commands
160 @ifclear DOSHOST
161 * Emacs:: Using @value{GDBN} under GNU Emacs
162 @end ifclear
163
164 * GDB Bugs:: Reporting bugs in @value{GDBN}
165 * Command Line Editing:: Facilities of the readline library
166 * Using History Interactively::
167 @ifset NOVEL
168 * Renamed Commands::
169 @end ifset
170 @ifclear PRECONFIGURED
171 * Formatting Documentation:: How to format and print GDB documentation
172 * Installing GDB:: Installing GDB
173 @end ifclear
174
175 * Index:: Index
176 @end menu
177 @end ifinfo
178
179 @node Summary
180 @unnumbered Summary of @value{GDBN}
181
182 The purpose of a debugger such as @value{GDBN} is to allow you to see what is
183 going on ``inside'' another program while it executes---or what another
184 program was doing at the moment it crashed.
185
186 @value{GDBN} can do four main kinds of things (plus other things in support of
187 these) to help you catch bugs in the act:
188
189 @itemize @bullet
190 @item
191 Start your program, specifying anything that might affect its behavior.
192
193 @item
194 Make your program stop on specified conditions.
195
196 @item
197 Examine what has happened, when your program has stopped.
198
199 @item
200 Change things in your program, so you can experiment with correcting the
201 effects of one bug and go on to learn about another.
202 @end itemize
203
204 @ifclear CONLY
205 @ifclear MOD2
206 You can use @value{GDBN} to debug programs written in C or C++.
207 @end ifclear
208 @ifset MOD2
209 You can use @value{GDBN} to debug programs written in C, C++, and
210 Modula-2.
211 @end ifset
212 @ifset FORTRAN
213 Fortran support will be added when a GNU Fortran compiler is ready.
214 @end ifset
215 @end ifclear
216
217 @menu
218 * Free Software:: Freely redistributable software
219 * Contributors:: Contributors to GDB
220 @end menu
221
222 @node Free Software
223 @unnumberedsec Free software
224
225 @value{GDBN} is @dfn{free software}, protected by the GNU General Public License
226 (GPL). The GPL gives you the freedom to copy or adapt a licensed
227 program---but every person getting a copy also gets with it the
228 freedom to modify that copy (which means that they must get access to
229 the source code), and the freedom to distribute further copies.
230 Typical software companies use copyrights to limit your freedoms; the
231 Free Software Foundation uses the GPL to preserve these freedoms.
232
233 Fundamentally, the General Public License is a license which says that
234 you have these freedoms and that you cannot take these freedoms away
235 from anyone else.
236
237 @node Contributors
238 @unnumberedsec Contributors to GDB
239
240 Richard Stallman was the original author of GDB, and of many other GNU
241 programs. Many others have contributed to its development. This
242 section attempts to credit major contributors. One of the virtues of
243 free software is that everyone is free to contribute to it; with
244 regret, we cannot actually acknowledge everyone here. The file
245 @file{ChangeLog} in the GDB distribution approximates a blow-by-blow
246 account.
247
248 Changes much prior to version 2.0 are lost in the mists of time.
249
250 @quotation
251 @emph{Plea:} Additions to this section are particularly welcome. If you
252 or your friends (or enemies, to be evenhanded) have been unfairly
253 omitted from this list, we would like to add your names!
254 @end quotation
255
256 So that they may not regard their long labor as thankless, we
257 particularly thank those who shepherded GDB through major releases: Fred
258 Fish (release 4.9), Stu Grossman and John Gilmore (releases 4.8, 4.7,
259 4.6, 4.5, 4.4), John Gilmore (releases 4.3, 4.2, 4.1, 4.0, and 3.9); Jim
260 Kingdon (releases 3.5, 3.4, 3.3); and Randy Smith (releases 3.2, 3.1,
261 3.0). As major maintainer of GDB for some period, each contributed
262 significantly to the structure, stability, and capabilities of the
263 entire debugger.
264
265 Richard Stallman, assisted at various times by Pete TerMaat, Chris
266 Hanson, and Richard Mlynarik, handled releases through 2.8.
267
268 @ifclear CONLY
269 Michael Tiemann is the author of most of the GNU C++ support in GDB,
270 with significant additional contributions from Per Bothner. James
271 Clark wrote the GNU C++ demangler. Early work on C++ was by Peter
272 TerMaat (who also did much general update work leading to release 3.0).
273 @end ifclear
274
275 GDB 4 uses the BFD subroutine library to examine multiple
276 object-file formats; BFD was a joint project of David V.
277 Henkel-Wallace, Rich Pixley, Steve Chamberlain, and John Gilmore.
278
279 David Johnson wrote the original COFF support; Pace Willison did
280 the original support for encapsulated COFF.
281
282 Adam de Boor and Bradley Davis contributed the ISI Optimum V support.
283 Per Bothner, Noboyuki Hikichi, and Alessandro Forin contributed MIPS
284 support. Jean-Daniel Fekete contributed Sun 386i support. Chris
285 Hanson improved the HP9000 support. Noboyuki Hikichi and Tomoyuki
286 Hasei contributed Sony/News OS 3 support. David Johnson contributed
287 Encore Umax support. Jyrki Kuoppala contributed Altos 3068 support.
288 Keith Packard contributed NS32K support. Doug Rabson contributed
289 Acorn Risc Machine support. Chris Smith contributed Convex support
290 (and Fortran debugging). Jonathan Stone contributed Pyramid support.
291 Michael Tiemann contributed SPARC support. Tim Tucker contributed
292 support for the Gould NP1 and Gould Powernode. Pace Willison
293 contributed Intel 386 support. Jay Vosburgh contributed Symmetry
294 support.
295
296 Rich Schaefer and Peter Schauer helped with support of SunOS shared
297 libraries.
298
299 Jay Fenlason and Roland McGrath ensured that GDB and GAS agree about
300 several machine instruction sets.
301
302 Patrick Duval, Ted Goldstein, Vikram Koka and Glenn Engel helped
303 develop remote debugging. Intel Corporation and Wind River Systems
304 contributed remote debugging modules for their products.
305
306 Brian Fox is the author of the readline libraries providing
307 command-line editing and command history.
308
309 Andrew Beers of SUNY Buffalo wrote the language-switching code,
310 @ifset MOD2
311 the Modula-2 support,
312 @end ifset
313 and contributed the Languages chapter of this manual.
314
315 Fred Fish wrote most of the support for Unix System Vr4.
316 @ifclear CONLY
317 He also enhanced the command-completion support to cover C++ overloaded
318 symbols.
319 @end ifclear
320
321 Hitachi America, Ltd. sponsored the support for Hitachi microprocessors.
322
323 @ifset NOVEL
324 @node New Features
325 @unnumbered New Features since GDB Version 3.5
326
327 @table @emph
328 @item Targets
329 Using the new command @code{target}, you can select at runtime whether
330 you are debugging local files, local processes, standalone systems over
331 a serial port, realtime systems over a TCP/IP connection, etc. The
332 command @code{load} can download programs into a remote system. Serial
333 stubs are available for Motorola 680x0, Intel 80386, and Sparc remote
334 systems; GDB also supports debugging realtime processes running under
335 VxWorks, using SunRPC Remote Procedure Calls over TCP/IP to talk to a
336 debugger stub on the target system. Internally, GDB now uses a function
337 vector to mediate access to different targets; if you need to add your
338 own support for a remote protocol, this makes it much easier.
339
340 @item Watchpoints
341 GDB now sports watchpoints as well as breakpoints. You can use a
342 watchpoint to stop execution whenever the value of an expression
343 changes, without having to predict a particular place in your program
344 where this may happen.
345
346 @item Wide Output
347 Commands that issue wide output now insert newlines at places designed
348 to make the output more readable.
349
350 @item Object Code Formats
351 GDB uses a new library called the Binary File Descriptor (BFD) Library
352 to permit it to switch dynamically, without reconfiguration or
353 recompilation, between different object-file formats. Formats currently
354 supported are COFF, ELF, a.out, Intel 960 b.out, MIPS ECOFF, HPPA SOM
355 (with stabs debugging), and S-records; files may be read as .o files,
356 archive libraries, or core dumps. BFD is available as a subroutine
357 library so that other programs may take advantage of it, and the other
358 GNU binary utilities are being converted to use it.
359
360 @item Configuration and Ports
361 Compile-time configuration (to select a particular architecture and
362 operating system) is much easier. The script @code{configure} now
363 allows you to configure GDB as either a native debugger or a
364 cross-debugger. @xref{Installing GDB}, for details on how to
365 configure.
366
367 @item Interaction
368 The user interface to the GDB control variables is simpler,
369 and is consolidated in two commands, @code{set} and @code{show}. Output
370 lines are now broken at readable places, rather than overflowing onto
371 the next line. You can suppress output of machine-level addresses,
372 displaying only source language information.
373
374 @item C++
375 GDB now supports C++ multiple inheritance (if used with a GCC
376 version 2 compiler), and also has limited support for C++ exception
377 handling, with the commands @code{catch} and @code{info catch}: GDB
378 can break when an exception is raised, before the stack is peeled back
379 to the exception handler's context.
380
381 @ifset MOD2
382 @item Modula-2
383 GDB now has preliminary support for the GNU Modula-2 compiler, currently
384 under development at the State University of New York at Buffalo.
385 Coordinated development of both GDB and the GNU Modula-2 compiler will
386 continue. Other Modula-2 compilers are currently not supported, and
387 attempting to debug programs compiled with them will likely result in an
388 error as the symbol table of the executable is read in.
389 @end ifset
390
391 @item Command Rationalization
392 Many GDB commands have been renamed to make them easier to remember
393 and use. In particular, the subcommands of @code{info} and
394 @code{show}/@code{set} are grouped to make the former refer to the state
395 of your program, and the latter refer to the state of GDB itself.
396 @xref{Renamed Commands}, for details on what commands were renamed.
397
398 @item Shared Libraries
399 GDB 4 can debug programs and core files that use SunOS, SVR4, or IBM RS/6000
400 shared libraries.
401
402 @item Reference Card
403 GDB 4 has a reference card. @xref{Formatting Documentation,,Formatting
404 the Documentation}, for instructions about how to print it.
405 @end table
406 @end ifset
407
408 @ifclear BARETARGET
409 @node Sample Session
410 @chapter A Sample @value{GDBN} Session
411
412 You can use this manual at your leisure to read all about @value{GDBN}.
413 However, a handful of commands are enough to get started using the
414 debugger. This chapter illustrates those commands.
415
416 @iftex
417 In this sample session, we emphasize user input like this: @b{input},
418 to make it easier to pick out from the surrounding output.
419 @end iftex
420
421 @c FIXME: this example may not be appropriate for some configs, where
422 @c FIXME...primary interest is in remote use.
423
424 One of the preliminary versions of GNU @code{m4} (a generic macro
425 processor) exhibits the following bug: sometimes, when we change its
426 quote strings from the default, the commands used to capture one macro
427 definition within another stop working. In the following short @code{m4}
428 session, we define a macro @code{foo} which expands to @code{0000}; we
429 then use the @code{m4} built-in @code{defn} to define @code{bar} as the
430 same thing. However, when we change the open quote string to
431 @code{<QUOTE>} and the close quote string to @code{<UNQUOTE>}, the same
432 procedure fails to define a new synonym @code{baz}:
433
434 @smallexample
435 $ @b{cd gnu/m4}
436 $ @b{./m4}
437 @b{define(foo,0000)}
438
439 @b{foo}
440 0000
441 @b{define(bar,defn(`foo'))}
442
443 @b{bar}
444 0000
445 @b{changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)}
446
447 @b{define(baz,defn(<QUOTE>foo<UNQUOTE>))}
448 @b{baz}
449 @b{C-d}
450 m4: End of input: 0: fatal error: EOF in string
451 @end smallexample
452
453 @noindent
454 Let us use @value{GDBN} to try to see what is going on.
455
456 @smallexample
457 $ @b{@value{GDBP} m4}
458 @c FIXME: this falsifies the exact text played out, to permit smallbook
459 @c FIXME... format to come out better.
460 GDB is free software and you are welcome to distribute copies
461 of it under certain conditions; type "show copying" to see
462 the conditions.
463 There is absolutely no warranty for GDB; type "show warranty"
464 for details.
465 GDB @value{GDBVN}, Copyright 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc...
466 (@value{GDBP})
467 @end smallexample
468
469 @noindent
470 @value{GDBN} reads only enough symbol data to know where to find the rest when
471 needed; as a result, the first prompt comes up very quickly. We now
472 tell @value{GDBN} to use a narrower display width than usual, so that examples
473 will fit in this manual.
474
475 @smallexample
476 (@value{GDBP}) @b{set width 70}
477 @end smallexample
478
479 @noindent
480 We need to see how the @code{m4} built-in @code{changequote} works.
481 Having looked at the source, we know the relevant subroutine is
482 @code{m4_changequote}, so we set a breakpoint there with the @value{GDBN}
483 @code{break} command.
484
485 @smallexample
486 (@value{GDBP}) @b{break m4_changequote}
487 Breakpoint 1 at 0x62f4: file builtin.c, line 879.
488 @end smallexample
489
490 @noindent
491 Using the @code{run} command, we start @code{m4} running under @value{GDBN}
492 control; as long as control does not reach the @code{m4_changequote}
493 subroutine, the program runs as usual:
494
495 @smallexample
496 (@value{GDBP}) @b{run}
497 Starting program: /work/Editorial/gdb/gnu/m4/m4
498 @b{define(foo,0000)}
499
500 @b{foo}
501 0000
502 @end smallexample
503
504 @noindent
505 To trigger the breakpoint, we call @code{changequote}. @value{GDBN}
506 suspends execution of @code{m4}, displaying information about the
507 context where it stops.
508
509 @smallexample
510 @b{changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)}
511
512 Breakpoint 1, m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
513 at builtin.c:879
514 879 if (bad_argc(TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[0]),argc,1,3))
515 @end smallexample
516
517 @noindent
518 Now we use the command @code{n} (@code{next}) to advance execution to
519 the next line of the current function.
520
521 @smallexample
522 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
523 882 set_quotes((argc >= 2) ? TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[1])\
524 : nil,
525 @end smallexample
526
527 @noindent
528 @code{set_quotes} looks like a promising subroutine. We can go into it
529 by using the command @code{s} (@code{step}) instead of @code{next}.
530 @code{step} goes to the next line to be executed in @emph{any}
531 subroutine, so it steps into @code{set_quotes}.
532
533 @smallexample
534 (@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
535 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
536 at input.c:530
537 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
538 @end smallexample
539
540 @noindent
541 The display that shows the subroutine where @code{m4} is now
542 suspended (and its arguments) is called a stack frame display. It
543 shows a summary of the stack. We can use the @code{backtrace}
544 command (which can also be spelled @code{bt}), to see where we are
545 in the stack as a whole: the @code{backtrace} command displays a
546 stack frame for each active subroutine.
547
548 @smallexample
549 (@value{GDBP}) @b{bt}
550 #0 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
551 at input.c:530
552 #1 0x6344 in m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
553 at builtin.c:882
554 #2 0x8174 in expand_macro (sym=0x33320) at macro.c:242
555 #3 0x7a88 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=209696, td=0xf7fffa30)
556 at macro.c:71
557 #4 0x79dc in expand_input () at macro.c:40
558 #5 0x2930 in main (argc=0, argv=0xf7fffb20) at m4.c:195
559 @end smallexample
560
561 @noindent
562 We will step through a few more lines to see what happens. The first two
563 times, we can use @samp{s}; the next two times we use @code{n} to avoid
564 falling into the @code{xstrdup} subroutine.
565
566 @smallexample
567 (@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
568 0x3b5c 532 if (rquote != def_rquote)
569 (@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
570 0x3b80 535 lquote = (lq == nil || *lq == '\0') ? \
571 def_lquote : xstrdup(lq);
572 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
573 536 rquote = (rq == nil || *rq == '\0') ? def_rquote\
574 : xstrdup(rq);
575 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
576 538 len_lquote = strlen(rquote);
577 @end smallexample
578
579 @noindent
580 The last line displayed looks a little odd; we can examine the variables
581 @code{lquote} and @code{rquote} to see if they are in fact the new left
582 and right quotes we specified. We use the command @code{p}
583 (@code{print}) to see their values.
584
585 @smallexample
586 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p lquote}
587 $1 = 0x35d40 "<QUOTE>"
588 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p rquote}
589 $2 = 0x35d50 "<UNQUOTE>"
590 @end smallexample
591
592 @noindent
593 @code{lquote} and @code{rquote} are indeed the new left and right quotes.
594 To look at some context, we can display ten lines of source
595 surrounding the current line with the @code{l} (@code{list}) command.
596
597 @smallexample
598 (@value{GDBP}) @b{l}
599 533 xfree(rquote);
600 534
601 535 lquote = (lq == nil || *lq == '\0') ? def_lquote\
602 : xstrdup (lq);
603 536 rquote = (rq == nil || *rq == '\0') ? def_rquote\
604 : xstrdup (rq);
605 537
606 538 len_lquote = strlen(rquote);
607 539 len_rquote = strlen(lquote);
608 540 @}
609 541
610 542 void
611 @end smallexample
612
613 @noindent
614 Let us step past the two lines that set @code{len_lquote} and
615 @code{len_rquote}, and then examine the values of those variables.
616
617 @smallexample
618 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
619 539 len_rquote = strlen(lquote);
620 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
621 540 @}
622 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_lquote}
623 $3 = 9
624 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_rquote}
625 $4 = 7
626 @end smallexample
627
628 @noindent
629 That certainly looks wrong, assuming @code{len_lquote} and
630 @code{len_rquote} are meant to be the lengths of @code{lquote} and
631 @code{rquote} respectively. We can set them to better values using
632 the @code{p} command, since it can print the value of
633 any expression---and that expression can include subroutine calls and
634 assignments.
635
636 @smallexample
637 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_lquote=strlen(lquote)}
638 $5 = 7
639 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_rquote=strlen(rquote)}
640 $6 = 9
641 @end smallexample
642
643 @noindent
644 Is that enough to fix the problem of using the new quotes with the
645 @code{m4} built-in @code{defn}? We can allow @code{m4} to continue
646 executing with the @code{c} (@code{continue}) command, and then try the
647 example that caused trouble initially:
648
649 @smallexample
650 (@value{GDBP}) @b{c}
651 Continuing.
652
653 @b{define(baz,defn(<QUOTE>foo<UNQUOTE>))}
654
655 baz
656 0000
657 @end smallexample
658
659 @noindent
660 Success! The new quotes now work just as well as the default ones. The
661 problem seems to have been just the two typos defining the wrong
662 lengths. We allow @code{m4} exit by giving it an EOF as input:
663
664 @smallexample
665 @b{C-d}
666 Program exited normally.
667 @end smallexample
668
669 @noindent
670 The message @samp{Program exited normally.} is from @value{GDBN}; it
671 indicates @code{m4} has finished executing. We can end our @value{GDBN}
672 session with the @value{GDBN} @code{quit} command.
673
674 @smallexample
675 (@value{GDBP}) @b{quit}
676 @end smallexample
677 @end ifclear
678
679 @node Invocation
680 @chapter Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}
681
682 This chapter discusses how to start @value{GDBN}, and how to get out of it.
683 (The essentials: type @samp{@value{GDBP}} to start GDB, and type @kbd{quit}
684 or @kbd{C-d} to exit.)
685
686 @menu
687 * Invoking GDB:: How to start @value{GDBN}
688 * Quitting GDB:: How to quit @value{GDBN}
689 * Shell Commands:: How to use shell commands inside @value{GDBN}
690 @end menu
691
692 @node Invoking GDB
693 @section Invoking @value{GDBN}
694
695 @ifset H8EXCLUSIVE
696 For details on starting up @value{GDBP} as a
697 remote debugger attached to a Hitachi microprocessor, see @ref{Hitachi
698 Remote,,@value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors}.
699 @end ifset
700
701 Invoke @value{GDBN} by running the program @code{@value{GDBP}}. Once started,
702 @value{GDBN} reads commands from the terminal until you tell it to exit.
703
704 You can also run @code{@value{GDBP}} with a variety of arguments and options,
705 to specify more of your debugging environment at the outset.
706
707 @ifset GENERIC
708 The command-line options described here are designed
709 to cover a variety of situations; in some environments, some of these
710 options may effectively be unavailable.
711 @end ifset
712
713 The most usual way to start @value{GDBN} is with one argument,
714 specifying an executable program:
715
716 @example
717 @value{GDBP} @var{program}
718 @end example
719
720 @ifclear BARETARGET
721 @noindent
722 You can also start with both an executable program and a core file
723 specified:
724
725 @example
726 @value{GDBP} @var{program} @var{core}
727 @end example
728
729 You can, instead, specify a process ID as a second argument, if you want
730 to debug a running process:
731
732 @example
733 @value{GDBP} @var{program} 1234
734 @end example
735
736 @noindent
737 would attach @value{GDBN} to process @code{1234} (unless you also have a file
738 named @file{1234}; @value{GDBN} does check for a core file first).
739
740 Taking advantage of the second command-line argument requires a fairly
741 complete operating system; when you use @value{GDBN} as a remote debugger
742 attached to a bare board, there may not be any notion of ``process'',
743 and there is often no way to get a core dump.
744 @end ifclear
745
746 @noindent
747 You can further control how @value{GDBN} starts up by using command-line
748 options. @value{GDBN} itself can remind you of the options available.
749
750 @noindent
751 Type
752
753 @example
754 @value{GDBP} -help
755 @end example
756
757 @noindent
758 to display all available options and briefly describe their use
759 (@samp{@value{GDBP} -h} is a shorter equivalent).
760
761 All options and command line arguments you give are processed
762 in sequential order. The order makes a difference when the
763 @samp{-x} option is used.
764
765
766 @menu
767 @ifclear GENERIC
768 @ifset REMOTESTUB
769 * Remote Serial:: @value{GDBN} remote serial protocol
770 @end ifset
771 @ifset I960
772 * i960-Nindy Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a remote i960 (Nindy)
773 @end ifset
774 @ifset AMD29K
775 * UDI29K Remote:: @value{GDBN} and the UDI protocol for AMD29K
776 * EB29K Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a remote EB29K
777 @end ifset
778 @ifset VXWORKS
779 * VxWorks Remote:: @value{GDBN} and VxWorks
780 @end ifset
781 @ifset ST2000
782 * ST2000 Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a Tandem ST2000
783 @end ifset
784 @ifset H8
785 * Hitachi Remote:: @value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors
786 @end ifset
787 @ifset MIPS
788 * MIPS Remote:: @value{GDBN} and MIPS boards
789 @end ifset
790 @ifset SIMS
791 * Simulator:: Simulated CPU target
792 @end ifset
793 @end ifclear
794 @c remnant makeinfo bug requires this blank line after *two* end-ifblahs:
795
796 * File Options:: Choosing files
797 * Mode Options:: Choosing modes
798 @end menu
799
800 @ifclear GENERIC
801 @include remote.texi
802 @end ifclear
803
804 @node File Options
805 @subsection Choosing files
806
807 @ifclear BARETARGET
808 When @value{GDBN} starts, it reads any arguments other than options as
809 specifying an executable file and core file (or process ID). This is
810 the same as if the arguments were specified by the @samp{-se} and
811 @samp{-c} options respectively. (@value{GDBN} reads the first argument
812 that does not have an associated option flag as equivalent to the
813 @samp{-se} option followed by that argument; and the second argument
814 that does not have an associated option flag, if any, as equivalent to
815 the @samp{-c} option followed by that argument.)
816 @end ifclear
817 @ifset BARETARGET
818 When @value{GDBN} starts, it reads any argument other than options as
819 specifying an executable file. This is the same as if the argument was
820 specified by the @samp{-se} option.
821 @end ifset
822
823 Many options have both long and short forms; both are shown in the
824 following list. @value{GDBN} also recognizes the long forms if you truncate
825 them, so long as enough of the option is present to be unambiguous.
826 (If you prefer, you can flag option arguments with @samp{--} rather
827 than @samp{-}, though we illustrate the more usual convention.)
828
829 @table @code
830 @item -symbols=@var{file}
831 @itemx -s @var{file}
832 Read symbol table from file @var{file}.
833
834 @item -exec=@var{file}
835 @itemx -e @var{file}
836 Use file @var{file} as the executable file to execute when
837 @ifset BARETARGET
838 appropriate.
839 @end ifset
840 @ifclear BARETARGET
841 appropriate, and for examining pure data in conjunction with a core
842 dump.
843 @end ifclear
844
845 @item -se=@var{file}
846 Read symbol table from file @var{file} and use it as the executable
847 file.
848
849 @ifclear BARETARGET
850 @item -core=@var{file}
851 @itemx -c @var{file}
852 Use file @var{file} as a core dump to examine.
853
854 @item -c @var{number}
855 Connect to process ID @var{number}, as with the @code{attach} command
856 (unless there is a file in core-dump format named @var{number}, in which
857 case @samp{-c} specifies that file as a core dump to read).
858 @end ifclear
859
860 @item -command=@var{file}
861 @itemx -x @var{file}
862 Execute @value{GDBN} commands from file @var{file}. @xref{Command
863 Files,, Command files}.
864
865 @item -directory=@var{directory}
866 @itemx -d @var{directory}
867 Add @var{directory} to the path to search for source files.
868
869 @ifclear BARETARGET
870 @item -m
871 @itemx -mapped
872 @emph{Warning: this option depends on operating system facilities that are not
873 supported on all systems.}@*
874 If memory-mapped files are available on your system through the @code{mmap}
875 system call, you can use this option
876 to have @value{GDBN} write the symbols from your
877 program into a reusable file in the current directory. If the program you are debugging is
878 called @file{/tmp/fred}, the mapped symbol file will be @file{./fred.syms}.
879 Future @value{GDBN} debugging sessions will notice the presence of this file,
880 and will quickly map in symbol information from it, rather than reading
881 the symbol table from the executable program.
882
883 @c FIXME! Really host, not target?
884 The @file{.syms} file is specific to the host machine where @value{GDBN}
885 is run. It holds an exact image of the internal @value{GDBN} symbol
886 table. It cannot be shared across multiple host platforms.
887 @end ifclear
888
889 @item -r
890 @itemx -readnow
891 Read each symbol file's entire symbol table immediately, rather than
892 the default, which is to read it incrementally as it is needed.
893 This makes startup slower, but makes future operations faster.
894 @end table
895
896 @ifclear BARETARGET
897 The @code{-mapped} and @code{-readnow} options are typically combined in
898 order to build a @file{.syms} file that contains complete symbol
899 information. (@xref{Files,,Commands to specify files}, for information
900 on @file{.syms} files.) A simple GDB invocation to do nothing but build
901 a @file{.syms} file for future use is:
902
903 @example
904 gdb -batch -nx -mapped -readnow programname
905 @end example
906 @end ifclear
907
908 @node Mode Options
909 @subsection Choosing modes
910
911 You can run @value{GDBN} in various alternative modes---for example, in
912 batch mode or quiet mode.
913
914 @table @code
915 @item -nx
916 @itemx -n
917 Do not execute commands from any initialization files (normally called
918 @file{@value{GDBINIT}}). Normally, the commands in these files are
919 executed after all the command options and arguments have been
920 processed. @xref{Command Files,,Command files}.
921
922 @item -quiet
923 @itemx -q
924 ``Quiet''. Do not print the introductory and copyright messages. These
925 messages are also suppressed in batch mode.
926
927 @item -batch
928 Run in batch mode. Exit with status @code{0} after processing all the
929 command files specified with @samp{-x} (and all commands from
930 initialization files, if not inhibited with @samp{-n}). Exit with
931 nonzero status if an error occurs in executing the @value{GDBN} commands
932 in the command files.
933
934 Batch mode may be useful for running @value{GDBN} as a filter, for example to
935 download and run a program on another computer; in order to make this
936 more useful, the message
937
938 @example
939 Program exited normally.
940 @end example
941
942 @noindent
943 (which is ordinarily issued whenever a program running under @value{GDBN} control
944 terminates) is not issued when running in batch mode.
945
946 @item -cd=@var{directory}
947 Run @value{GDBN} using @var{directory} as its working directory,
948 instead of the current directory.
949
950 @ifset LUCID
951 @item -context @var{authentication}
952 When the Energize programming system starts up @value{GDBN}, it uses this
953 option to trigger an alternate mode of interaction.
954 @var{authentication} is a pair of numeric codes that identify @value{GDBN}
955 as a client in the Energize environment. Avoid this option when you run
956 @value{GDBN} directly from the command line. See @ref{Energize,,Using
957 @value{GDBN} with Energize} for more discussion of using @value{GDBN} with Energize.
958 @end ifset
959
960 @ifclear DOSHOST
961 @item -fullname
962 @itemx -f
963 Emacs sets this option when it runs @value{GDBN} as a subprocess. It tells @value{GDBN}
964 to output the full file name and line number in a standard,
965 recognizable fashion each time a stack frame is displayed (which
966 includes each time your program stops). This recognizable format looks
967 like two @samp{\032} characters, followed by the file name, line number
968 and character position separated by colons, and a newline. The
969 Emacs-to-@value{GDBN} interface program uses the two @samp{\032} characters as
970 a signal to display the source code for the frame.
971 @end ifclear
972
973 @ifset SERIAL
974 @item -b @var{bps}
975 Set the line speed (baud rate or bits per second) of any serial
976 interface used by @value{GDBN} for remote debugging.
977
978 @item -tty=@var{device}
979 Run using @var{device} for your program's standard input and output.
980 @c FIXME: kingdon thinks there is more to -tty. Investigate.
981 @end ifset
982 @end table
983
984 @node Quitting GDB
985 @section Quitting @value{GDBN}
986 @cindex exiting @value{GDBN}
987 @cindex leaving @value{GDBN}
988
989 @table @code
990 @item quit
991 @kindex quit
992 @kindex q
993 To exit @value{GDBN}, use the @code{quit} command (abbreviated @code{q}), or type
994 an end-of-file character (usually @kbd{C-d}).
995 @end table
996
997 @cindex interrupt
998 An interrupt (often @kbd{C-c}) will not exit from @value{GDBN}, but rather
999 will terminate the action of any @value{GDBN} command that is in progress and
1000 return to @value{GDBN} command level. It is safe to type the interrupt
1001 character at any time because @value{GDBN} does not allow it to take effect
1002 until a time when it is safe.
1003
1004 @ifclear BARETARGET
1005 If you have been using @value{GDBN} to control an attached process or
1006 device, you can release it with the @code{detach} command
1007 (@pxref{Attach, ,Debugging an already-running process}).
1008 @end ifclear
1009
1010 @node Shell Commands
1011 @section Shell commands
1012
1013 If you need to execute occasional shell commands during your
1014 debugging session, there is no need to leave or suspend @value{GDBN}; you can
1015 just use the @code{shell} command.
1016
1017 @table @code
1018 @item shell @var{command string}
1019 @kindex shell
1020 @cindex shell escape
1021 Invoke a the standard shell to execute @var{command string}.
1022 @ifclear DOSHOST
1023 If it exists, the environment variable @code{SHELL} determines which
1024 shell to run. Otherwise @value{GDBN} uses @code{/bin/sh}.
1025 @end ifclear
1026 @end table
1027
1028 The utility @code{make} is often needed in development environments.
1029 You do not have to use the @code{shell} command for this purpose in
1030 @value{GDBN}:
1031
1032 @table @code
1033 @item make @var{make-args}
1034 @kindex make
1035 @cindex calling make
1036 Execute the @code{make} program with the specified
1037 arguments. This is equivalent to @samp{shell make @var{make-args}}.
1038 @end table
1039
1040 @node Commands
1041 @chapter @value{GDBN} Commands
1042
1043 You can abbreviate a @value{GDBN} command to the first few letters of the command
1044 name, if that abbreviation is unambiguous; and you can repeat certain
1045 @value{GDBN} commands by typing just @key{RET}. You can also use the @key{TAB}
1046 key to get @value{GDBN} to fill out the rest of a word in a command (or to
1047 show you the alternatives available, if there is more than one possibility).
1048
1049 @menu
1050 * Command Syntax:: How to give commands to @value{GDBN}
1051 * Completion:: Command completion
1052 * Help:: How to ask @value{GDBN} for help
1053 @end menu
1054
1055 @node Command Syntax
1056 @section Command syntax
1057
1058 A @value{GDBN} command is a single line of input. There is no limit on
1059 how long it can be. It starts with a command name, which is followed by
1060 arguments whose meaning depends on the command name. For example, the
1061 command @code{step} accepts an argument which is the number of times to
1062 step, as in @samp{step 5}. You can also use the @code{step} command
1063 with no arguments. Some command names do not allow any arguments.
1064
1065 @cindex abbreviation
1066 @value{GDBN} command names may always be truncated if that abbreviation is
1067 unambiguous. Other possible command abbreviations are listed in the
1068 documentation for individual commands. In some cases, even ambiguous
1069 abbreviations are allowed; for example, @code{s} is specially defined as
1070 equivalent to @code{step} even though there are other commands whose
1071 names start with @code{s}. You can test abbreviations by using them as
1072 arguments to the @code{help} command.
1073
1074 @cindex repeating commands
1075 @kindex RET
1076 A blank line as input to @value{GDBN} (typing just @key{RET}) means to
1077 repeat the previous command. Certain commands (for example, @code{run})
1078 will not repeat this way; these are commands for which unintentional
1079 repetition might cause trouble and which you are unlikely to want to
1080 repeat.
1081
1082 The @code{list} and @code{x} commands, when you repeat them with
1083 @key{RET}, construct new arguments rather than repeating
1084 exactly as typed. This permits easy scanning of source or memory.
1085
1086 @value{GDBN} can also use @key{RET} in another way: to partition lengthy
1087 output, in a way similar to the common utility @code{more}
1088 (@pxref{Screen Size,,Screen size}). Since it is easy to press one
1089 @key{RET} too many in this situation, @value{GDBN} disables command
1090 repetition after any command that generates this sort of display.
1091
1092 @kindex #
1093 @cindex comment
1094 Any text from a @kbd{#} to the end of the line is a comment; it does
1095 nothing. This is useful mainly in command files (@pxref{Command
1096 Files,,Command files}).
1097
1098 @node Completion
1099 @section Command completion
1100
1101 @cindex completion
1102 @cindex word completion
1103 @value{GDBN} can fill in the rest of a word in a command for you, if there is
1104 only one possibility; it can also show you what the valid possibilities
1105 are for the next word in a command, at any time. This works for @value{GDBN}
1106 commands, @value{GDBN} subcommands, and the names of symbols in your program.
1107
1108 Press the @key{TAB} key whenever you want @value{GDBN} to fill out the rest
1109 of a word. If there is only one possibility, @value{GDBN} will fill in the
1110 word, and wait for you to finish the command (or press @key{RET} to
1111 enter it). For example, if you type
1112
1113 @c FIXME "@key" does not distinguish its argument sufficiently to permit
1114 @c complete accuracy in these examples; space introduced for clarity.
1115 @c If texinfo enhancements make it unnecessary, it would be nice to
1116 @c replace " @key" by "@key" in the following...
1117 @example
1118 (@value{GDBP}) info bre @key{TAB}
1119 @end example
1120
1121 @noindent
1122 @value{GDBN} fills in the rest of the word @samp{breakpoints}, since that is
1123 the only @code{info} subcommand beginning with @samp{bre}:
1124
1125 @example
1126 (@value{GDBP}) info breakpoints
1127 @end example
1128
1129 @noindent
1130 You can either press @key{RET} at this point, to run the @code{info
1131 breakpoints} command, or backspace and enter something else, if
1132 @samp{breakpoints} does not look like the command you expected. (If you
1133 were sure you wanted @code{info breakpoints} in the first place, you
1134 might as well just type @key{RET} immediately after @samp{info bre},
1135 to exploit command abbreviations rather than command completion).
1136
1137 If there is more than one possibility for the next word when you press
1138 @key{TAB}, @value{GDBN} will sound a bell. You can either supply more
1139 characters and try again, or just press @key{TAB} a second time, and
1140 @value{GDBN} will display all the possible completions for that word. For
1141 example, you might want to set a breakpoint on a subroutine whose name
1142 begins with @samp{make_}, but when you type @kbd{b make_@key{TAB}} @value{GDBN}
1143 just sounds the bell. Typing @key{TAB} again will display all the
1144 function names in your program that begin with those characters, for
1145 example:
1146
1147 @example
1148 (@value{GDBP}) b make_ @key{TAB}
1149 @exdent @value{GDBN} sounds bell; press @key{TAB} again, to see:
1150 make_a_section_from_file make_environ
1151 make_abs_section make_function_type
1152 make_blockvector make_pointer_type
1153 make_cleanup make_reference_type
1154 make_command make_symbol_completion_list
1155 (@value{GDBP}) b make_
1156 @end example
1157
1158 @noindent
1159 After displaying the available possibilities, @value{GDBN} copies your
1160 partial input (@samp{b make_} in the example) so you can finish the
1161 command.
1162
1163 If you just want to see the list of alternatives in the first place, you
1164 can press @kbd{M-?} rather than pressing @key{TAB} twice. @kbd{M-?}
1165 means @kbd{@key{META} ?}. You can type this
1166 @ifclear DOSHOST
1167 either by holding down a
1168 key designated as the @key{META} shift on your keyboard (if there is
1169 one) while typing @kbd{?}, or
1170 @end ifclear
1171 as @key{ESC} followed by @kbd{?}.
1172
1173 @cindex quotes in commands
1174 @cindex completion of quoted strings
1175 Sometimes the string you need, while logically a ``word'', may contain
1176 parentheses or other characters that @value{GDBN} normally excludes from its
1177 notion of a word. To permit word completion to work in this situation,
1178 you may enclose words in @code{'} (single quote marks) in @value{GDBN} commands.
1179
1180 @ifclear CONLY
1181 The most likely situation where you might need this is in typing the
1182 name of a C++ function. This is because C++ allows function overloading
1183 (multiple definitions of the same function, distinguished by argument
1184 type). For example, when you want to set a breakpoint you may need to
1185 distinguish whether you mean the version of @code{name} that takes an
1186 @code{int} parameter, @code{name(int)}, or the version that takes a
1187 @code{float} parameter, @code{name(float)}. To use the word-completion
1188 facilities in this situation, type a single quote @code{'} at the
1189 beginning of the function name. This alerts @value{GDBN} that it may need to
1190 consider more information than usual when you press @key{TAB} or
1191 @kbd{M-?} to request word completion:
1192
1193 @example
1194 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble( @key{M-?}
1195 bubble(double,double) bubble(int,int)
1196 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble(
1197 @end example
1198
1199 In some cases, @value{GDBN} can tell that completing a name will require
1200 quotes. When this happens, @value{GDBN} will insert the quote for you (while
1201 completing as much as it can) if you do not type the quote in the first
1202 place:
1203
1204 @example
1205 (@value{GDBP}) b bub @key{TAB}
1206 @exdent @value{GDBN} alters your input line to the following, and rings a bell:
1207 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble(
1208 @end example
1209
1210 @noindent
1211 In general, @value{GDBN} can tell that a quote is needed (and inserts it) if
1212 you have not yet started typing the argument list when you ask for
1213 completion on an overloaded symbol.
1214 @end ifclear
1215
1216
1217 @node Help
1218 @section Getting help
1219 @cindex online documentation
1220 @kindex help
1221
1222 You can always ask @value{GDBN} itself for information on its commands, using the
1223 command @code{help}.
1224
1225 @table @code
1226 @item help
1227 @itemx h
1228 @kindex h
1229 You can use @code{help} (abbreviated @code{h}) with no arguments to
1230 display a short list of named classes of commands:
1231
1232 @smallexample
1233 (@value{GDBP}) help
1234 List of classes of commands:
1235
1236 running -- Running the program
1237 stack -- Examining the stack
1238 data -- Examining data
1239 breakpoints -- Making program stop at certain points
1240 files -- Specifying and examining files
1241 status -- Status inquiries
1242 support -- Support facilities
1243 user-defined -- User-defined commands
1244 aliases -- Aliases of other commands
1245 obscure -- Obscure features
1246
1247 Type "help" followed by a class name for a list of
1248 commands in that class.
1249 Type "help" followed by command name for full
1250 documentation.
1251 Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
1252 (@value{GDBP})
1253 @end smallexample
1254
1255 @item help @var{class}
1256 Using one of the general help classes as an argument, you can get a
1257 list of the individual commands in that class. For example, here is the
1258 help display for the class @code{status}:
1259
1260 @smallexample
1261 (@value{GDBP}) help status
1262 Status inquiries.
1263
1264 List of commands:
1265
1266 @c Line break in "show" line falsifies real output, but needed
1267 @c to fit in smallbook page size.
1268 show -- Generic command for showing things set
1269 with "set"
1270 info -- Generic command for printing status
1271
1272 Type "help" followed by command name for full
1273 documentation.
1274 Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
1275 (@value{GDBP})
1276 @end smallexample
1277
1278 @item help @var{command}
1279 With a command name as @code{help} argument, @value{GDBN} will display a
1280 short paragraph on how to use that command.
1281 @end table
1282
1283 In addition to @code{help}, you can use the @value{GDBN} commands @code{info}
1284 and @code{show} to inquire about the state of your program, or the state
1285 of @value{GDBN} itself. Each command supports many topics of inquiry; this
1286 manual introduces each of them in the appropriate context. The listings
1287 under @code{info} and under @code{show} in the Index point to
1288 all the sub-commands. @xref{Index}.
1289
1290 @c @group
1291 @table @code
1292 @item info
1293 @kindex info
1294 @kindex i
1295 This command (abbreviated @code{i}) is for describing the state of your
1296 program. For example, you can list the arguments given to your program
1297 with @code{info args}, list the registers currently in use with @code{info
1298 registers}, or list the breakpoints you have set with @code{info breakpoints}.
1299 You can get a complete list of the @code{info} sub-commands with
1300 @w{@code{help info}}.
1301
1302 @kindex show
1303 @item show
1304 In contrast, @code{show} is for describing the state of @value{GDBN} itself.
1305 You can change most of the things you can @code{show}, by using the
1306 related command @code{set}; for example, you can control what number
1307 system is used for displays with @code{set radix}, or simply inquire
1308 which is currently in use with @code{show radix}.
1309
1310 @kindex info set
1311 To display all the settable parameters and their current
1312 values, you can use @code{show} with no arguments; you may also use
1313 @code{info set}. Both commands produce the same display.
1314 @c FIXME: "info set" violates the rule that "info" is for state of
1315 @c FIXME...program. Ck w/ GNU: "info set" to be called something else,
1316 @c FIXME...or change desc of rule---eg "state of prog and debugging session"?
1317 @end table
1318 @c @end group
1319
1320 Here are three miscellaneous @code{show} subcommands, all of which are
1321 exceptional in lacking corresponding @code{set} commands:
1322
1323 @table @code
1324 @kindex show version
1325 @cindex version number
1326 @item show version
1327 Show what version of @value{GDBN} is running. You should include this
1328 information in @value{GDBN} bug-reports. If multiple versions of @value{GDBN} are in
1329 use at your site, you may occasionally want to determine which version
1330 of @value{GDBN} you are running; as @value{GDBN} evolves, new commands are introduced,
1331 and old ones may wither away. The version number is also announced
1332 when you start @value{GDBN}.
1333
1334 @kindex show copying
1335 @item show copying
1336 Display information about permission for copying @value{GDBN}.
1337
1338 @kindex show warranty
1339 @item show warranty
1340 Display the GNU ``NO WARRANTY'' statement.
1341 @end table
1342
1343 @node Running
1344 @chapter Running Programs Under @value{GDBN}
1345
1346 When you run a program under @value{GDBN}, you must first generate
1347 debugging information when you compile it.
1348 @ifclear BARETARGET
1349 You may start it with its arguments, if any, in an environment of your
1350 choice. You may redirect your program's input and output, debug an
1351 already running process, or kill a child process.
1352 @end ifclear
1353
1354 @menu
1355 * Compilation:: Compiling for debugging
1356 * Starting:: Starting your program
1357 @ifclear BARETARGET
1358 * Arguments:: Your program's arguments
1359 * Environment:: Your program's environment
1360 * Working Directory:: Your program's working directory
1361 * Input/Output:: Your program's input and output
1362 * Attach:: Debugging an already-running process
1363 * Kill Process:: Killing the child process
1364 * Process Information:: Additional process information
1365 @end ifclear
1366 @end menu
1367
1368 @node Compilation
1369 @section Compiling for debugging
1370
1371 In order to debug a program effectively, you need to generate
1372 debugging information when you compile it. This debugging information
1373 is stored in the object file; it describes the data type of each
1374 variable or function and the correspondence between source line numbers
1375 and addresses in the executable code.
1376
1377 To request debugging information, specify the @samp{-g} option when you run
1378 the compiler.
1379
1380 Many C compilers are unable to handle the @samp{-g} and @samp{-O}
1381 options together. Using those compilers, you cannot generate optimized
1382 executables containing debugging information.
1383
1384 @value{NGCC}, the GNU C compiler, supports @samp{-g} with or without
1385 @samp{-O}, making it possible to debug optimized code. We recommend
1386 that you @emph{always} use @samp{-g} whenever you compile a program.
1387 You may think your program is correct, but there is no sense in pushing
1388 your luck.
1389
1390 @cindex optimized code, debugging
1391 @cindex debugging optimized code
1392 When you debug a program compiled with @samp{-g -O}, remember that the
1393 optimizer is rearranging your code; the debugger will show you what is
1394 really there. Do not be too surprised when the execution path does not
1395 exactly match your source file! An extreme example: if you define a
1396 variable, but never use it, @value{GDBN} will never see that
1397 variable---because the compiler optimizes it out of existence.
1398
1399 Some things do not work as well with @samp{-g -O} as with just
1400 @samp{-g}, particularly on machines with instruction scheduling. If in
1401 doubt, recompile with @samp{-g} alone, and if this fixes the problem,
1402 please report it as a bug (including a test case!).
1403
1404 Older versions of the GNU C compiler permitted a variant option
1405 @w{@samp{-gg}} for debugging information. @value{GDBN} no longer supports this
1406 format; if your GNU C compiler has this option, do not use it.
1407
1408 @ignore
1409 @comment As far as I know, there are no cases in which @value{GDBN} will
1410 @comment produce strange output in this case. (but no promises).
1411 If your program includes archives made with the @code{ar} program, and
1412 if the object files used as input to @code{ar} were compiled without the
1413 @samp{-g} option and have names longer than 15 characters, @value{GDBN} will get
1414 confused reading your program's symbol table. No error message will be
1415 given, but @value{GDBN} may behave strangely. The reason for this problem is a
1416 deficiency in the Unix archive file format, which cannot represent file
1417 names longer than 15 characters.
1418
1419 To avoid this problem, compile the archive members with the @samp{-g}
1420 option or use shorter file names. Alternatively, use a version of GNU
1421 @code{ar} dated more recently than August 1989.
1422 @end ignore
1423
1424 @need 2000
1425 @node Starting
1426 @section Starting your program
1427 @cindex starting
1428 @cindex running
1429
1430 @table @code
1431 @item run
1432 @itemx r
1433 @kindex run
1434 Use the @code{run} command to start your program under @value{GDBN}. You must
1435 first specify the program name
1436 @ifset VXWORKS
1437 (except on VxWorks)
1438 @end ifset
1439 with an argument to @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Invocation, ,Getting In and
1440 Out of @value{GDBN}}), or by using the @code{file} or @code{exec-file}
1441 command (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
1442
1443 @end table
1444
1445 @ifclear BARETARGET
1446 If you are running your program in an execution environment that
1447 supports processes, @code{run} creates an inferior process and makes
1448 that process run your program. (In environments without processes,
1449 @code{run} jumps to the start of your program.)
1450
1451 The execution of a program is affected by certain information it
1452 receives from its superior. @value{GDBN} provides ways to specify this
1453 information, which you must do @emph{before} starting your program. (You
1454 can change it after starting your program, but such changes will only affect
1455 your program the next time you start it.) This information may be
1456 divided into four categories:
1457
1458 @table @asis
1459 @item The @emph{arguments.}
1460 Specify the arguments to give your program as the arguments of the
1461 @code{run} command. If a shell is available on your target, the shell
1462 is used to pass the arguments, so that you may use normal conventions
1463 (such as wildcard expansion or variable substitution) in describing
1464 the arguments. In Unix systems, you can control which shell is used
1465 with the @code{SHELL} environment variable. @xref{Arguments, ,Your
1466 program's arguments}.
1467
1468 @item The @emph{environment.}
1469 Your program normally inherits its environment from @value{GDBN}, but you can
1470 use the @value{GDBN} commands @code{set environment} and @code{unset
1471 environment} to change parts of the environment that will be given to
1472 your program. @xref{Environment, ,Your program's environment}.
1473
1474 @item The @emph{working directory.}
1475 Your program inherits its working directory from @value{GDBN}. You can set
1476 the @value{GDBN} working directory with the @code{cd} command in @value{GDBN}.
1477 @xref{Working Directory, ,Your program's working directory}.
1478
1479 @item The @emph{standard input and output.}
1480 Your program normally uses the same device for standard input and
1481 standard output as @value{GDBN} is using. You can redirect input and output
1482 in the @code{run} command line, or you can use the @code{tty} command to
1483 set a different device for your program.
1484 @xref{Input/Output, ,Your program's input and output}.
1485
1486 @cindex pipes
1487 @emph{Warning:} While input and output redirection work, you cannot use
1488 pipes to pass the output of the program you are debugging to another
1489 program; if you attempt this, @value{GDBN} is likely to wind up debugging the
1490 wrong program.
1491 @end table
1492 @end ifclear
1493
1494 When you issue the @code{run} command, your program begins to execute
1495 immediately. @xref{Stopping, ,Stopping and continuing}, for discussion
1496 of how to arrange for your program to stop. Once your program has
1497 stopped, you may calls functions in your program, using the @code{print}
1498 or @code{call} commands. @xref{Data, ,Examining Data}.
1499
1500 If the modification time of your symbol file has changed since the
1501 last time @value{GDBN} read its symbols, @value{GDBN} will discard its symbol table and
1502 re-read it. When it does this, @value{GDBN} tries to retain your current
1503 breakpoints.
1504
1505 @ifclear BARETARGET
1506 @node Arguments
1507 @section Your program's arguments
1508
1509 @cindex arguments (to your program)
1510 The arguments to your program can be specified by the arguments of the
1511 @code{run} command. They are passed to a shell, which expands wildcard
1512 characters and performs redirection of I/O, and thence to your program.
1513 Your @code{SHELL} environment variable (if it exists) specifies what
1514 shell @value{GDBN} if you do not define @code{SHELL}, @value{GDBN} uses
1515 @code{/bin/sh}.
1516
1517 @code{run} with no arguments uses the same arguments used by the previous
1518 @code{run}, or those set by the @code{set args} command.
1519
1520 @kindex set args
1521 @table @code
1522 @item set args
1523 Specify the arguments to be used the next time your program is run. If
1524 @code{set args} has no arguments, @code{run} will execute your program
1525 with no arguments. Once you have run your program with arguments,
1526 using @code{set args} before the next @code{run} is the only way to run
1527 it again without arguments.
1528
1529 @item show args
1530 @kindex show args
1531 Show the arguments to give your program when it is started.
1532 @end table
1533
1534 @node Environment
1535 @section Your program's environment
1536
1537 @cindex environment (of your program)
1538 The @dfn{environment} consists of a set of environment variables and
1539 their values. Environment variables conventionally record such things as
1540 your user name, your home directory, your terminal type, and your search
1541 path for programs to run. Usually you set up environment variables with
1542 the shell and they are inherited by all the other programs you run. When
1543 debugging, it can be useful to try running your program with a modified
1544 environment without having to start @value{GDBN} over again.
1545
1546 @table @code
1547 @item path @var{directory}
1548 @kindex path
1549 Add @var{directory} to the front of the @code{PATH} environment variable
1550 (the search path for executables), for both @value{GDBN} and your program.
1551 You may specify several directory names, separated by @samp{:} or
1552 whitespace. If @var{directory} is already in the path, it is moved to
1553 the front, so it will be searched sooner.
1554
1555 You can use the string @samp{$cwd} to refer to whatever is the current
1556 working directory at the time @value{GDBN} searches the path. If you
1557 use @samp{.} instead, it refers to the directory where you executed the
1558 @code{path} command. @value{GDBN} replaces @samp{.} in the
1559 @var{directory} argument (with the current path) before adding
1560 @var{directory} to the search path.
1561 @c 'path' is explicitly nonrepeatable, but RMS points out it is silly to
1562 @c document that, since repeating it would be a no-op.
1563
1564 @item show paths
1565 @kindex show paths
1566 Display the list of search paths for executables (the @code{PATH}
1567 environment variable).
1568
1569 @item show environment @r{[}@var{varname}@r{]}
1570 @kindex show environment
1571 Print the value of environment variable @var{varname} to be given to
1572 your program when it starts. If you do not supply @var{varname},
1573 print the names and values of all environment variables to be given to
1574 your program. You can abbreviate @code{environment} as @code{env}.
1575
1576 @item set environment @var{varname} @r{[}=@r{]} @var{value}
1577 @kindex set environment
1578 Set environment variable @var{varname} to @var{value}. The value
1579 changes for your program only, not for @value{GDBN} itself. @var{value} may
1580 be any string; the values of environment variables are just strings, and
1581 any interpretation is supplied by your program itself. The @var{value}
1582 parameter is optional; if it is eliminated, the variable is set to a
1583 null value.
1584 @c "any string" here does not include leading, trailing
1585 @c blanks. Gnu asks: does anyone care?
1586
1587 For example, this command:
1588
1589 @example
1590 set env USER = foo
1591 @end example
1592
1593 @noindent
1594 tells a Unix program, when subsequently run, that its user is named
1595 @samp{foo}. (The spaces around @samp{=} are used for clarity here; they
1596 are not actually required.)
1597
1598 @item unset environment @var{varname}
1599 @kindex unset environment
1600 Remove variable @var{varname} from the environment to be passed to your
1601 program. This is different from @samp{set env @var{varname} =};
1602 @code{unset environment} removes the variable from the environment,
1603 rather than assigning it an empty value.
1604 @end table
1605
1606 @emph{Warning:} @value{GDBN} runs your program using the shell indicated
1607 by your @code{SHELL} environment variable if it exists (or
1608 @code{/bin/sh} if not). If your @code{SHELL} variable names a shell
1609 that runs an initialization file---such as @file{.cshrc} for C-shell, or
1610 @file{.bashrc} for BASH---any variables you set in that file will affect
1611 your program. You may wish to move setting of environment variables to
1612 files that are only run when you sign on, such as @file{.login} or
1613 @file{.profile}.
1614
1615 @node Working Directory
1616 @section Your program's working directory
1617
1618 @cindex working directory (of your program)
1619 Each time you start your program with @code{run}, it inherits its
1620 working directory from the current working directory of @value{GDBN}.
1621 The @value{GDBN} working directory is initially whatever it inherited
1622 from its parent process (typically the shell), but you can specify a new
1623 working directory in @value{GDBN} with the @code{cd} command.
1624
1625 The @value{GDBN} working directory also serves as a default for the commands
1626 that specify files for @value{GDBN} to operate on. @xref{Files, ,Commands to
1627 specify files}.
1628
1629 @table @code
1630 @item cd @var{directory}
1631 @kindex cd
1632 Set the @value{GDBN} working directory to @var{directory}.
1633
1634 @item pwd
1635 @kindex pwd
1636 Print the @value{GDBN} working directory.
1637 @end table
1638
1639 @node Input/Output
1640 @section Your program's input and output
1641
1642 @cindex redirection
1643 @cindex i/o
1644 @cindex terminal
1645 By default, the program you run under @value{GDBN} does input and output to
1646 the same terminal that @value{GDBN} uses. @value{GDBN} switches the terminal to
1647 its own terminal modes to interact with you, but it records the terminal
1648 modes your program was using and switches back to them when you continue
1649 running your program.
1650
1651 @table @code
1652 @item info terminal
1653 @kindex info terminal
1654 Displays information recorded by @value{GDBN} about the terminal modes your
1655 program is using.
1656 @end table
1657
1658 You can redirect your program's input and/or output using shell
1659 redirection with the @code{run} command. For example,
1660
1661 @example
1662 run > outfile
1663 @end example
1664
1665 @noindent
1666 starts your program, diverting its output to the file @file{outfile}.
1667
1668 @kindex tty
1669 @cindex controlling terminal
1670 Another way to specify where your program should do input and output is
1671 with the @code{tty} command. This command accepts a file name as
1672 argument, and causes this file to be the default for future @code{run}
1673 commands. It also resets the controlling terminal for the child
1674 process, for future @code{run} commands. For example,
1675
1676 @example
1677 tty /dev/ttyb
1678 @end example
1679
1680 @noindent
1681 directs that processes started with subsequent @code{run} commands
1682 default to do input and output on the terminal @file{/dev/ttyb} and have
1683 that as their controlling terminal.
1684
1685 An explicit redirection in @code{run} overrides the @code{tty} command's
1686 effect on the input/output device, but not its effect on the controlling
1687 terminal.
1688
1689 When you use the @code{tty} command or redirect input in the @code{run}
1690 command, only the input @emph{for your program} is affected. The input
1691 for @value{GDBN} still comes from your terminal.
1692
1693 @node Attach
1694 @section Debugging an already-running process
1695 @kindex attach
1696 @cindex attach
1697
1698 @table @code
1699 @item attach @var{process-id}
1700 This command attaches to a running process---one that was started
1701 outside @value{GDBN}. (@code{info files} will show your active
1702 targets.) The command takes as argument a process ID. The usual way to
1703 find out the process-id of a Unix process is with the @code{ps} utility,
1704 or with the @samp{jobs -l} shell command.
1705
1706 @code{attach} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} a second time after
1707 executing the command.
1708 @end table
1709
1710 To use @code{attach}, your program must be running in an environment
1711 which supports processes; for example, @code{attach} does not work for
1712 programs on bare-board targets that lack an operating system. You must
1713 also have permission to send the process a signal.
1714
1715 When using @code{attach}, you should first use the @code{file} command
1716 to specify the program running in the process and load its symbol table.
1717 @xref{Files, ,Commands to Specify Files}.
1718
1719 The first thing @value{GDBN} does after arranging to debug the specified
1720 process is to stop it. You can examine and modify an attached process
1721 with all the @value{GDBN} commands that are ordinarily available when you start
1722 processes with @code{run}. You can insert breakpoints; you can step and
1723 continue; you can modify storage. If you would rather the process
1724 continue running, you may use the @code{continue} command after
1725 attaching @value{GDBN} to the process.
1726
1727 @table @code
1728 @item detach
1729 @kindex detach
1730 When you have finished debugging the attached process, you can use the
1731 @code{detach} command to release it from @value{GDBN} control. Detaching
1732 the process continues its execution. After the @code{detach} command,
1733 that process and @value{GDBN} become completely independent once more, and you
1734 are ready to @code{attach} another process or start one with @code{run}.
1735 @code{detach} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after
1736 executing the command.
1737 @end table
1738
1739 If you exit @value{GDBN} or use the @code{run} command while you have an attached
1740 process, you kill that process. By default, you will be asked for
1741 confirmation if you try to do either of these things; you can control
1742 whether or not you need to confirm by using the @code{set confirm} command
1743 (@pxref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and messages}).
1744
1745 @node Kill Process
1746 @c @group
1747 @section Killing the child process
1748
1749 @table @code
1750 @item kill
1751 @kindex kill
1752 Kill the child process in which your program is running under @value{GDBN}.
1753 @end table
1754
1755 This command is useful if you wish to debug a core dump instead of a
1756 running process. @value{GDBN} ignores any core dump file while your program
1757 is running.
1758 @c @end group
1759
1760 On some operating systems, a program cannot be executed outside @value{GDBN}
1761 while you have breakpoints set on it inside @value{GDBN}. You can use the
1762 @code{kill} command in this situation to permit running your program
1763 outside the debugger.
1764
1765 The @code{kill} command is also useful if you wish to recompile and
1766 relink your program, since on many systems it is impossible to modify an
1767 executable file while it is running in a process. In this case, when you
1768 next type @code{run}, @value{GDBN} will notice that the file has changed, and
1769 will re-read the symbol table (while trying to preserve your current
1770 breakpoint settings).
1771
1772 @node Process Information
1773 @section Additional process information
1774
1775 @kindex /proc
1776 @cindex process image
1777 Some operating systems provide a facility called @samp{/proc} that can
1778 be used to examine the image of a running process using file-system
1779 subroutines. If @value{GDBN} is configured for an operating system with this
1780 facility, the command @code{info proc} is available to report on several
1781 kinds of information about the process running your program.
1782
1783 @table @code
1784 @item info proc
1785 @kindex info proc
1786 Summarize available information about the process.
1787
1788 @item info proc mappings
1789 @kindex info proc mappings
1790 Report on the address ranges accessible in the program, with information
1791 on whether your program may read, write, or execute each range.
1792
1793 @item info proc times
1794 @kindex info proc times
1795 Starting time, user CPU time, and system CPU time for your program and
1796 its children.
1797
1798 @item info proc id
1799 @kindex info proc id
1800 Report on the process IDs related to your program: its own process ID,
1801 the ID of its parent, the process group ID, and the session ID.
1802
1803 @item info proc status
1804 @kindex info proc status
1805 General information on the state of the process. If the process is
1806 stopped, this report includes the reason for stopping, and any signal
1807 received.
1808
1809 @item info proc all
1810 Show all the above information about the process.
1811 @end table
1812 @end ifclear
1813
1814 @node Stopping
1815 @chapter Stopping and Continuing
1816
1817 The principal purposes of using a debugger are so that you can stop your
1818 program before it terminates; or so that, if your program runs into
1819 trouble, you can investigate and find out why.
1820
1821 Inside @value{GDBN}, your program may stop for any of several reasons, such
1822 as
1823 @ifclear BARETARGET
1824 a signal,
1825 @end ifclear
1826 a breakpoint, or reaching a new line after a @value{GDBN}
1827 command such as @code{step}. You may then examine and change
1828 variables, set new breakpoints or remove old ones, and then continue
1829 execution. Usually, the messages shown by @value{GDBN} provide ample
1830 explanation of the status of your program---but you can also explicitly
1831 request this information at any time.
1832
1833 @table @code
1834 @item info program
1835 @kindex info program
1836 Display information about the status of your program: whether it is
1837 running or not,
1838 @ifclear BARETARGET
1839 what process it is,
1840 @end ifclear
1841 and why it stopped.
1842 @end table
1843
1844 @menu
1845 @ifclear CONLY
1846 * Breakpoints:: Breakpoints, watchpoints, and exceptions
1847 @end ifclear
1848 @ifset CONLY
1849 * Breakpoints:: Breakpoints and watchpoints
1850 @end ifset
1851 @c Remnant makeinfo bug requires blank line after *successful* end-if in menu:
1852
1853 * Continuing and Stepping:: Resuming execution
1854 @ifset POSIX
1855 * Signals:: Signals
1856 @end ifset
1857 @end menu
1858
1859 @c makeinfo node-defaulting requires adjacency of @node and sectioning cmds
1860 @c ...hence distribute @node Breakpoints over two possible @if expansions.
1861 @c
1862 @ifclear CONLY
1863 @node Breakpoints
1864 @section Breakpoints, watchpoints, and exceptions
1865 @end ifclear
1866 @ifset CONLY
1867 @node Breakpoints
1868 @section Breakpoints and watchpoints
1869 @end ifset
1870
1871 @cindex breakpoints
1872 A @dfn{breakpoint} makes your program stop whenever a certain point in
1873 the program is reached. For each breakpoint, you can add various
1874 conditions to control in finer detail whether your program will stop.
1875 You can set breakpoints with the @code{break} command and its variants
1876 (@pxref{Set Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}), to specify the place where
1877 your program should stop by line number, function name or exact address
1878 in the program.
1879 @ifclear CONLY
1880 In languages with exception handling (such as GNU C++), you can also set
1881 breakpoints where an exception is raised (@pxref{Exception Handling,
1882 ,Breakpoints and exceptions}).
1883 @end ifclear
1884
1885 @cindex watchpoints
1886 @cindex memory tracing
1887 @cindex breakpoint on memory address
1888 @cindex breakpoint on variable modification
1889 A @dfn{watchpoint} is a special breakpoint that stops your program
1890 when the value of an expression changes. You must use a different
1891 command to set watchpoints (@pxref{Set Watchpoints, ,Setting
1892 watchpoints}), but aside from that, you can manage a watchpoint like
1893 any other breakpoint: you enable, disable, and delete both breakpoints
1894 and watchpoints using the same commands.
1895
1896 You can arrange to have values from your program displayed automatically
1897 whenever @value{GDBN} stops at a breakpoint. @xref{Auto Display,
1898 ,Automatic display}.
1899
1900 @cindex breakpoint numbers
1901 @cindex numbers for breakpoints
1902 @value{GDBN} assigns a number to each breakpoint or watchpoint when you
1903 create it; these numbers are successive integers starting with one. In
1904 many of the commands for controlling various features of breakpoints you
1905 use the breakpoint number to say which breakpoint you want to change.
1906 Each breakpoint may be @dfn{enabled} or @dfn{disabled}; if disabled, it has
1907 no effect on your program until you enable it again.
1908
1909 @menu
1910 * Set Breaks:: Setting breakpoints
1911 * Set Watchpoints:: Setting watchpoints
1912 @ifclear CONLY
1913 * Exception Handling:: Breakpoints and exceptions
1914 @end ifclear
1915
1916 * Delete Breaks:: Deleting breakpoints
1917 * Disabling:: Disabling breakpoints
1918 * Conditions:: Break conditions
1919 * Break Commands:: Breakpoint command lists
1920 @ifclear CONLY
1921 * Breakpoint Menus:: Breakpoint menus
1922 @end ifclear
1923 @ifclear BARETARGET
1924 * Error in Breakpoints:: ``Cannot insert breakpoints''
1925 @end ifclear
1926 @end menu
1927
1928 @node Set Breaks
1929 @subsection Setting breakpoints
1930
1931 @c FIXME LMB what does GDB do if no code on line of breakpt?
1932 @c consider in particular declaration with/without initialization.
1933 @c
1934 @c FIXME 2 is there stuff on this already? break at fun start, already init?
1935
1936 @kindex break
1937 @kindex b
1938 @kindex $bpnum
1939 @cindex latest breakpoint
1940 Breakpoints are set with the @code{break} command (abbreviated
1941 @code{b}). The debugger convenience variable @samp{$bpnum} records the
1942 number of the beakpoint you've set most recently; see @ref{Convenience
1943 Vars,, Convenience variables}, for a discussion of what you can do with
1944 convenience variables.
1945
1946 You have several ways to say where the breakpoint should go.
1947
1948 @table @code
1949 @item break @var{function}
1950 Set a breakpoint at entry to function @var{function}.
1951 @ifclear CONLY
1952 When using source languages that permit overloading of symbols, such as
1953 C++, @var{function} may refer to more than one possible place to break.
1954 @xref{Breakpoint Menus,,Breakpoint menus}, for a discussion of that situation.
1955 @end ifclear
1956
1957 @item break +@var{offset}
1958 @itemx break -@var{offset}
1959 Set a breakpoint some number of lines forward or back from the position
1960 at which execution stopped in the currently selected frame.
1961
1962 @item break @var{linenum}
1963 Set a breakpoint at line @var{linenum} in the current source file.
1964 That file is the last file whose source text was printed. This
1965 breakpoint will stop your program just before it executes any of the
1966 code on that line.
1967
1968 @item break @var{filename}:@var{linenum}
1969 Set a breakpoint at line @var{linenum} in source file @var{filename}.
1970
1971 @item break @var{filename}:@var{function}
1972 Set a breakpoint at entry to function @var{function} found in file
1973 @var{filename}. Specifying a file name as well as a function name is
1974 superfluous except when multiple files contain similarly named
1975 functions.
1976
1977 @item break *@var{address}
1978 Set a breakpoint at address @var{address}. You can use this to set
1979 breakpoints in parts of your program which do not have debugging
1980 information or source files.
1981
1982 @item break
1983 When called without any arguments, @code{break} sets a breakpoint at
1984 the next instruction to be executed in the selected stack frame
1985 (@pxref{Stack, ,Examining the Stack}). In any selected frame but the
1986 innermost, this will cause your program to stop as soon as control
1987 returns to that frame. This is similar to the effect of a
1988 @code{finish} command in the frame inside the selected frame---except
1989 that @code{finish} does not leave an active breakpoint. If you use
1990 @code{break} without an argument in the innermost frame, @value{GDBN} will stop
1991 the next time it reaches the current location; this may be useful
1992 inside loops.
1993
1994 @value{GDBN} normally ignores breakpoints when it resumes execution, until at
1995 least one instruction has been executed. If it did not do this, you
1996 would be unable to proceed past a breakpoint without first disabling the
1997 breakpoint. This rule applies whether or not the breakpoint already
1998 existed when your program stopped.
1999
2000 @item break @dots{} if @var{cond}
2001 Set a breakpoint with condition @var{cond}; evaluate the expression
2002 @var{cond} each time the breakpoint is reached, and stop only if the
2003 value is nonzero---that is, if @var{cond} evaluates as true.
2004 @samp{@dots{}} stands for one of the possible arguments described
2005 above (or no argument) specifying where to break. @xref{Conditions,
2006 ,Break conditions}, for more information on breakpoint conditions.
2007
2008 @item tbreak @var{args}
2009 @kindex tbreak
2010 Set a breakpoint enabled only for one stop. @var{args} are the
2011 same as for the @code{break} command, and the breakpoint is set in the same
2012 way, but the breakpoint is automatically disabled after the first time your
2013 program stops there. @xref{Disabling, ,Disabling breakpoints}.
2014
2015 @item rbreak @var{regex}
2016 @kindex rbreak
2017 @cindex regular expression
2018 @c FIXME what kind of regexp?
2019 Set breakpoints on all functions matching the regular expression
2020 @var{regex}. This command
2021 sets an unconditional breakpoint on all matches, printing a list of all
2022 breakpoints it set. Once these breakpoints are set, they are treated
2023 just like the breakpoints set with the @code{break} command. They can
2024 be deleted, disabled, made conditional, etc., in the standard ways.
2025
2026 @ifclear CONLY
2027 When debugging C++ programs, @code{rbreak} is useful for setting
2028 breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
2029 classes.
2030 @end ifclear
2031
2032 @kindex info breakpoints
2033 @cindex @code{$_} and @code{info breakpoints}
2034 @item info breakpoints @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2035 @itemx info break @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2036 @itemx info watchpoints @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2037 Print a table of all breakpoints and watchpoints set and not
2038 deleted, with the following columns for each breakpoint:
2039
2040 @table @emph
2041 @item Breakpoint Numbers
2042 @item Type
2043 Breakpoint or watchpoint.
2044 @item Disposition
2045 Whether the breakpoint is marked to be disabled or deleted when hit.
2046 @item Enabled or Disabled
2047 Enabled breakpoints are marked with @samp{y}. @samp{n} marks breakpoints
2048 that are not enabled.
2049 @item Address
2050 Where the breakpoint is in your program, as a memory address
2051 @item What
2052 Where the breakpoint is in the source for your program, as a file and
2053 line number.
2054 @end table
2055
2056 @noindent
2057 If a breakpoint is conditional, @code{info break} shows the condition on
2058 the line following the affected breakpoint; breakpoint commands, if any,
2059 are listed after that.
2060
2061 @noindent
2062 @code{info break} with a breakpoint
2063 number @var{n} as argument lists only that breakpoint. The
2064 convenience variable @code{$_} and the default examining-address for
2065 the @code{x} command are set to the address of the last breakpoint
2066 listed (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining memory}).
2067 @end table
2068
2069 @value{GDBN} allows you to set any number of breakpoints at the same place in
2070 your program. There is nothing silly or meaningless about this. When
2071 the breakpoints are conditional, this is even useful
2072 (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions}).
2073
2074 @cindex negative breakpoint numbers
2075 @cindex internal @value{GDBN} breakpoints
2076 @value{GDBN} itself sometimes sets breakpoints in your program for special
2077 purposes, such as proper handling of @code{longjmp} (in C programs).
2078 These internal breakpoints are assigned negative numbers, starting with
2079 @code{-1}; @samp{info breakpoints} does not display them.
2080
2081 You can see these breakpoints with the @value{GDBN} maintenance command
2082 @samp{maint info breakpoints}.
2083
2084 @table @code
2085 @kindex maint info breakpoints
2086 @item maint info breakpoints
2087 Using the same format as @samp{info breakpoints}, display both the
2088 breakpoints you've set explicitly, and those @value{GDBN} is using for
2089 internal purposes. Internal breakpoints are shown with negative
2090 breakpoint numbers. The type column identifies what kind of breakpoint
2091 is shown:
2092
2093 @table @code
2094 @item breakpoint
2095 Normal, explicitly set breakpoint.
2096
2097 @item watchpoint
2098 Normal, explicitly set watchpoint.
2099
2100 @item longjmp
2101 Internal breakpoint, used to handle correctly stepping through
2102 @code{longjmp} calls.
2103
2104 @item longjmp resume
2105 Internal breakpoint at the target of a @code{longjmp}.
2106
2107 @item until
2108 Temporary internal breakpoint used by the @value{GDBN} @code{until} command.
2109
2110 @item finish
2111 Temporary internal breakpoint used by the @value{GDBN} @code{finish} command.
2112 @end table
2113
2114 @end table
2115
2116
2117 @node Set Watchpoints
2118 @subsection Setting watchpoints
2119 @cindex setting watchpoints
2120
2121 You can use a watchpoint to stop execution whenever the value of an
2122 expression changes, without having to predict a particular place
2123 where this may happen.
2124
2125 Watchpoints currently execute two orders of magnitude more slowly than
2126 other breakpoints, but this can well be worth it to catch errors where
2127 you have no clue what part of your program is the culprit. Some
2128 processors provide special hardware to support watchpoint evaluation; future
2129 releases of @value{GDBN} will use such hardware if it is available.
2130
2131 @table @code
2132 @kindex watch
2133 @item watch @var{expr}
2134 Set a watchpoint for an expression.
2135
2136 @kindex info watchpoints
2137 @item info watchpoints
2138 This command prints a list of watchpoints and breakpoints; it is the
2139 same as @code{info break}.
2140 @end table
2141
2142 @ifclear CONLY
2143 @node Exception Handling
2144 @subsection Breakpoints and exceptions
2145 @cindex exception handlers
2146
2147 Some languages, such as GNU C++, implement exception handling. You can
2148 use @value{GDBN} to examine what caused your program to raise an exception,
2149 and to list the exceptions your program is prepared to handle at a
2150 given point in time.
2151
2152 @table @code
2153 @item catch @var{exceptions}
2154 @kindex catch
2155 You can set breakpoints at active exception handlers by using the
2156 @code{catch} command. @var{exceptions} is a list of names of exceptions
2157 to catch.
2158 @end table
2159
2160 You can use @code{info catch} to list active exception handlers.
2161 @xref{Frame Info, ,Information about a frame}.
2162
2163 There are currently some limitations to exception handling in @value{GDBN}.
2164 These will be corrected in a future release.
2165
2166 @itemize @bullet
2167 @item
2168 If you call a function interactively, @value{GDBN} normally returns
2169 control to you when the function has finished executing. If the call
2170 raises an exception, however, the call may bypass the mechanism that
2171 returns control to you and cause your program to simply continue
2172 running until it hits a breakpoint, catches a signal that @value{GDBN} is
2173 listening for, or exits.
2174 @item
2175 You cannot raise an exception interactively.
2176 @item
2177 You cannot interactively install an exception handler.
2178 @end itemize
2179
2180 @cindex raise exceptions
2181 Sometimes @code{catch} is not the best way to debug exception handling:
2182 if you need to know exactly where an exception is raised, it is better to
2183 stop @emph{before} the exception handler is called, since that way you
2184 can see the stack before any unwinding takes place. If you set a
2185 breakpoint in an exception handler instead, it may not be easy to find
2186 out where the exception was raised.
2187
2188 To stop just before an exception handler is called, you need some
2189 knowledge of the implementation. In the case of GNU C++, exceptions are
2190 raised by calling a library function named @code{__raise_exception}
2191 which has the following ANSI C interface:
2192
2193 @example
2194 /* @var{addr} is where the exception identifier is stored.
2195 ID is the exception identifier. */
2196 void __raise_exception (void **@var{addr}, void *@var{id});
2197 @end example
2198
2199 @noindent
2200 To make the debugger catch all exceptions before any stack
2201 unwinding takes place, set a breakpoint on @code{__raise_exception}
2202 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints; watchpoints; and exceptions}).
2203
2204 With a conditional breakpoint (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions})
2205 that depends on the value of @var{id}, you can stop your program when
2206 a specific exception is raised. You can use multiple conditional
2207 breakpoints to stop your program when any of a number of exceptions are
2208 raised.
2209 @end ifclear
2210
2211 @node Delete Breaks
2212 @subsection Deleting breakpoints
2213
2214 @cindex clearing breakpoints, watchpoints
2215 @cindex deleting breakpoints, watchpoints
2216 It is often necessary to eliminate a breakpoint or watchpoint once it
2217 has done its job and you no longer want your program to stop there. This
2218 is called @dfn{deleting} the breakpoint. A breakpoint that has been
2219 deleted no longer exists; it is forgotten.
2220
2221 With the @code{clear} command you can delete breakpoints according to
2222 where they are in your program. With the @code{delete} command you can
2223 delete individual breakpoints or watchpoints by specifying their
2224 breakpoint numbers.
2225
2226 It is not necessary to delete a breakpoint to proceed past it. @value{GDBN}
2227 automatically ignores breakpoints on the first instruction to be executed
2228 when you continue execution without changing the execution address.
2229
2230 @table @code
2231 @item clear
2232 @kindex clear
2233 Delete any breakpoints at the next instruction to be executed in the
2234 selected stack frame (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}). When
2235 the innermost frame is selected, this is a good way to delete a
2236 breakpoint where your program just stopped.
2237
2238 @item clear @var{function}
2239 @itemx clear @var{filename}:@var{function}
2240 Delete any breakpoints set at entry to the function @var{function}.
2241
2242 @item clear @var{linenum}
2243 @itemx clear @var{filename}:@var{linenum}
2244 Delete any breakpoints set at or within the code of the specified line.
2245
2246 @item delete @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2247 @cindex delete breakpoints
2248 @kindex delete
2249 @kindex d
2250 Delete the breakpoints or watchpoints of the numbers specified as
2251 arguments. If no argument is specified, delete all breakpoints (@value{GDBN}
2252 asks confirmation, unless you have @code{set confirm off}). You
2253 can abbreviate this command as @code{d}.
2254 @end table
2255
2256 @node Disabling
2257 @subsection Disabling breakpoints
2258
2259 @cindex disabled breakpoints
2260 @cindex enabled breakpoints
2261 Rather than deleting a breakpoint or watchpoint, you might prefer to
2262 @dfn{disable} it. This makes the breakpoint inoperative as if it had
2263 been deleted, but remembers the information on the breakpoint so that
2264 you can @dfn{enable} it again later.
2265
2266 You disable and enable breakpoints and watchpoints with the
2267 @code{enable} and @code{disable} commands, optionally specifying one or
2268 more breakpoint numbers as arguments. Use @code{info break} or
2269 @code{info watch} to print a list of breakpoints or watchpoints if you
2270 do not know which numbers to use.
2271
2272 A breakpoint or watchpoint can have any of four different states of
2273 enablement:
2274
2275 @itemize @bullet
2276 @item
2277 Enabled. The breakpoint will stop your program. A breakpoint set
2278 with the @code{break} command starts out in this state.
2279 @item
2280 Disabled. The breakpoint has no effect on your program.
2281 @item
2282 Enabled once. The breakpoint will stop your program, but
2283 when it does so it will become disabled. A breakpoint set
2284 with the @code{tbreak} command starts out in this state.
2285 @item
2286 Enabled for deletion. The breakpoint will stop your program, but
2287 immediately after it does so it will be deleted permanently.
2288 @end itemize
2289
2290 You can use the following commands to enable or disable breakpoints and
2291 watchpoints:
2292
2293 @table @code
2294 @item disable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2295 @kindex disable breakpoints
2296 @kindex disable
2297 @kindex dis
2298 Disable the specified breakpoints---or all breakpoints, if none are
2299 listed. A disabled breakpoint has no effect but is not forgotten. All
2300 options such as ignore-counts, conditions and commands are remembered in
2301 case the breakpoint is enabled again later. You may abbreviate
2302 @code{disable} as @code{dis}.
2303
2304 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2305 @kindex enable breakpoints
2306 @kindex enable
2307 Enable the specified breakpoints (or all defined breakpoints). They
2308 become effective once again in stopping your program.
2309
2310 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} once @var{bnums}@dots{}
2311 Enable the specified breakpoints temporarily. Each will be disabled
2312 again the next time it stops your program.
2313
2314 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} delete @var{bnums}@dots{}
2315 Enable the specified breakpoints to work once and then die. Each of
2316 the breakpoints will be deleted the next time it stops your program.
2317 @end table
2318
2319 Save for a breakpoint set with @code{tbreak} (@pxref{Set Breaks,
2320 ,Setting breakpoints}), breakpoints that you set are initially enabled;
2321 subsequently, they become disabled or enabled only when you use one of
2322 the commands above. (The command @code{until} can set and delete a
2323 breakpoint of its own, but it will not change the state of your other
2324 breakpoints; see @ref{Continuing and Stepping, ,Continuing and
2325 stepping}.)
2326
2327 @node Conditions
2328 @subsection Break conditions
2329 @cindex conditional breakpoints
2330 @cindex breakpoint conditions
2331
2332 @c FIXME what is scope of break condition expr? Context where wanted?
2333 @c in particular for a watchpoint?
2334 The simplest sort of breakpoint breaks every time your program reaches a
2335 specified place. You can also specify a @dfn{condition} for a
2336 breakpoint. A condition is just a Boolean expression in your
2337 programming language (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}). A breakpoint with
2338 a condition evaluates the expression each time your program reaches it,
2339 and your program stops only if the condition is @emph{true}.
2340
2341 This is the converse of using assertions for program validation; in that
2342 situation, you want to stop when the assertion is violated---that is,
2343 when the condition is false. In C, if you want to test an assertion expressed
2344 by the condition @var{assert}, you should set the condition
2345 @samp{! @var{assert}} on the appropriate breakpoint.
2346
2347 Conditions are also accepted for watchpoints; you may not need them,
2348 since a watchpoint is inspecting the value of an expression anyhow---but
2349 it might be simpler, say, to just set a watchpoint on a variable name,
2350 and specify a condition that tests whether the new value is an interesting
2351 one.
2352
2353 Break conditions can have side effects, and may even call functions in
2354 your program. This can be useful, for example, to activate functions
2355 that log program progress, or to use your own print functions to
2356 format special data structures. The effects are completely predictable
2357 unless there is another enabled breakpoint at the same address. (In
2358 that case, @value{GDBN} might see the other breakpoint first and stop your
2359 program without checking the condition of this one.) Note that
2360 breakpoint commands are usually more convenient and flexible for the
2361 purpose of performing side effects when a breakpoint is reached
2362 (@pxref{Break Commands, ,Breakpoint command lists}).
2363
2364 Break conditions can be specified when a breakpoint is set, by using
2365 @samp{if} in the arguments to the @code{break} command. @xref{Set
2366 Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}. They can also be changed at any time
2367 with the @code{condition} command. The @code{watch} command does not
2368 recognize the @code{if} keyword; @code{condition} is the only way to
2369 impose a further condition on a watchpoint.
2370
2371 @table @code
2372 @item condition @var{bnum} @var{expression}
2373 @kindex condition
2374 Specify @var{expression} as the break condition for breakpoint or
2375 watchpoint number @var{bnum}. From now on, this breakpoint will stop
2376 your program only if the value of @var{expression} is true (nonzero, in
2377 C). When you use @code{condition}, @value{GDBN} checks @var{expression}
2378 immediately for syntactic correctness, and to determine whether symbols
2379 in it have referents in the context of your breakpoint.
2380 @c FIXME so what does GDB do if there is no referent? Moreover, what
2381 @c about watchpoints?
2382 @value{GDBN} does
2383 not actually evaluate @var{expression} at the time the @code{condition}
2384 command is given, however. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
2385
2386 @item condition @var{bnum}
2387 Remove the condition from breakpoint number @var{bnum}. It becomes
2388 an ordinary unconditional breakpoint.
2389 @end table
2390
2391 @cindex ignore count (of breakpoint)
2392 A special case of a breakpoint condition is to stop only when the
2393 breakpoint has been reached a certain number of times. This is so
2394 useful that there is a special way to do it, using the @dfn{ignore
2395 count} of the breakpoint. Every breakpoint has an ignore count, which
2396 is an integer. Most of the time, the ignore count is zero, and
2397 therefore has no effect. But if your program reaches a breakpoint whose
2398 ignore count is positive, then instead of stopping, it just decrements
2399 the ignore count by one and continues. As a result, if the ignore count
2400 value is @var{n}, the breakpoint will not stop the next @var{n} times it
2401 is reached.
2402
2403 @table @code
2404 @item ignore @var{bnum} @var{count}
2405 @kindex ignore
2406 Set the ignore count of breakpoint number @var{bnum} to @var{count}.
2407 The next @var{count} times the breakpoint is reached, your program's
2408 execution will not stop; other than to decrement the ignore count, @value{GDBN}
2409 takes no action.
2410
2411 To make the breakpoint stop the next time it is reached, specify
2412 a count of zero.
2413
2414 When you use @code{continue} to resume execution of your program from a
2415 breakpoint, you can specify an ignore count directly as an argument to
2416 @code{continue}, rather than using @code{ignore}. @xref{Continuing and
2417 Stepping,,Continuing and stepping}.
2418
2419 If a breakpoint has a positive ignore count and a condition, the condition
2420 is not checked. Once the ignore count reaches zero, the condition will
2421 be checked.
2422
2423 You could achieve the effect of the ignore count with a condition such
2424 as @w{@samp{$foo-- <= 0}} using a debugger convenience variable that
2425 is decremented each time. @xref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
2426 variables}.
2427 @end table
2428
2429 @node Break Commands
2430 @subsection Breakpoint command lists
2431
2432 @cindex breakpoint commands
2433 You can give any breakpoint (or watchpoint) a series of commands to
2434 execute when your program stops due to that breakpoint. For example, you
2435 might want to print the values of certain expressions, or enable other
2436 breakpoints.
2437
2438 @table @code
2439 @item commands @r{[}@var{bnum}@r{]}
2440 @itemx @dots{} @var{command-list} @dots{}
2441 @itemx end
2442 @kindex commands
2443 @kindex end
2444 Specify a list of commands for breakpoint number @var{bnum}. The commands
2445 themselves appear on the following lines. Type a line containing just
2446 @code{end} to terminate the commands.
2447
2448 To remove all commands from a breakpoint, type @code{commands} and
2449 follow it immediately with @code{end}; that is, give no commands.
2450
2451 With no @var{bnum} argument, @code{commands} refers to the last
2452 breakpoint or watchpoint set (not to the breakpoint most recently
2453 encountered).
2454 @end table
2455
2456 Pressing @key{RET} as a means of repeating the last @value{GDBN} command is
2457 disabled within a @var{command-list}.
2458
2459 You can use breakpoint commands to start your program up again. Simply
2460 use the @code{continue} command, or @code{step}, or any other command
2461 that resumes execution.
2462
2463 Any other commands in the command list, after a command that resumes
2464 execution, are ignored. This is because any time you resume execution
2465 (even with a simple @code{next} or @code{step}), you may encounter
2466 another breakpoint---which could have its own command list, leading to
2467 ambiguities about which list to execute.
2468
2469 @kindex silent
2470 If the first command you specify in a command list is @code{silent}, the
2471 usual message about stopping at a breakpoint is not printed. This may
2472 be desirable for breakpoints that are to print a specific message and
2473 then continue. If none of the remaining commands print anything, you
2474 will see no sign that the breakpoint was reached. @code{silent} is
2475 meaningful only at the beginning of a breakpoint command list.
2476
2477 The commands @code{echo}, @code{output}, and @code{printf} allow you to
2478 print precisely controlled output, and are often useful in silent
2479 breakpoints. @xref{Output, ,Commands for controlled output}.
2480
2481 For example, here is how you could use breakpoint commands to print the
2482 value of @code{x} at entry to @code{foo} whenever @code{x} is positive.
2483
2484 @example
2485 break foo if x>0
2486 commands
2487 silent
2488 printf "x is %d\n",x
2489 cont
2490 end
2491 @end example
2492
2493 One application for breakpoint commands is to compensate for one bug so
2494 you can test for another. Put a breakpoint just after the erroneous line
2495 of code, give it a condition to detect the case in which something
2496 erroneous has been done, and give it commands to assign correct values
2497 to any variables that need them. End with the @code{continue} command
2498 so that your program does not stop, and start with the @code{silent}
2499 command so that no output is produced. Here is an example:
2500
2501 @example
2502 break 403
2503 commands
2504 silent
2505 set x = y + 4
2506 cont
2507 end
2508 @end example
2509
2510 @cindex lost output
2511 @c Do we need to mention this at all? I am sort of tempted to mention
2512 @c it in case people are used to seeing this section of the manual. But
2513 @c for new users it is an annoyance--it documents something which isn't
2514 @c there. -kingdon, 6 Jul 93
2515 Previous versions of @value{GDBN} (4.9 and earlier) would flush pending
2516 input when executing breakpoint commands, if your program used raw mode
2517 for the terminal. This is no longer true.
2518
2519 @ignore
2520 @c I don't think this is true any longer, now that only readline
2521 @c switches to or from raw mode. In any event, it is a (relatively
2522 @c easily fixable) GDB bug if it switches to or from raw mode except
2523 @c when it has to in order to read input from the terminal. kingdon -6 Jul 93.
2524 One deficiency in the operation of automatically continuing breakpoints
2525 under Unix appears when your program uses raw mode for the terminal.
2526 @value{GDBN} switches back to its own terminal modes (not raw) before executing
2527 commands, and then must switch back to raw mode when your program is
2528 continued. This causes any pending terminal input to be lost.
2529 @c FIXME: revisit below when GNU sys avail.
2530 @c In the GNU system, this will be fixed by changing the behavior of
2531 @c terminal modes.
2532
2533 Under Unix, you can get around this problem by writing actions into
2534 the breakpoint condition rather than in commands. For example,
2535
2536 @example
2537 condition 5 (x = y + 4), 0
2538 @end example
2539
2540 @noindent
2541 specifies a condition expression (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}) that will
2542 change @code{x} as needed, then always have the value zero so your
2543 program will not stop. No input is lost here, because @value{GDBN} evaluates
2544 break conditions without changing the terminal modes. When you want
2545 to have nontrivial conditions for performing the side effects, the
2546 operators @samp{&&}, @samp{||} and @samp{?@dots{}:} may be useful.
2547 @end ignore
2548
2549 @ifclear CONLY
2550 @node Breakpoint Menus
2551 @subsection Breakpoint menus
2552 @cindex overloading
2553 @cindex symbol overloading
2554
2555 Some programming languages (notably C++) permit a single function name
2556 to be defined several times, for application in different contexts.
2557 This is called @dfn{overloading}. When a function name is overloaded,
2558 @samp{break @var{function}} is not enough to tell @value{GDBN} where you want
2559 a breakpoint. If you realize this will be a problem, you can use
2560 something like @samp{break @var{function}(@var{types})} to specify which
2561 particular version of the function you want. Otherwise, @value{GDBN} offers
2562 you a menu of numbered choices for different possible breakpoints, and
2563 waits for your selection with the prompt @samp{>}. The first two
2564 options are always @samp{[0] cancel} and @samp{[1] all}. Typing @kbd{1}
2565 sets a breakpoint at each definition of @var{function}, and typing
2566 @kbd{0} aborts the @code{break} command without setting any new
2567 breakpoints.
2568
2569 For example, the following session excerpt shows an attempt to set a
2570 breakpoint at the overloaded symbol @code{String::after}.
2571 We choose three particular definitions of that function name:
2572
2573 @c FIXME! This is likely to change to show arg type lists, at least
2574 @smallexample
2575 (@value{GDBP}) b String::after
2576 [0] cancel
2577 [1] all
2578 [2] file:String.cc; line number:867
2579 [3] file:String.cc; line number:860
2580 [4] file:String.cc; line number:875
2581 [5] file:String.cc; line number:853
2582 [6] file:String.cc; line number:846
2583 [7] file:String.cc; line number:735
2584 > 2 4 6
2585 Breakpoint 1 at 0xb26c: file String.cc, line 867.
2586 Breakpoint 2 at 0xb344: file String.cc, line 875.
2587 Breakpoint 3 at 0xafcc: file String.cc, line 846.
2588 Multiple breakpoints were set.
2589 Use the "delete" command to delete unwanted
2590 breakpoints.
2591 (@value{GDBP})
2592 @end smallexample
2593 @end ifclear
2594
2595 @ifclear BARETARGET
2596 @node Error in Breakpoints
2597 @subsection ``Cannot insert breakpoints''
2598
2599 @c FIXME: "cannot insert breakpoints" error, v unclear.
2600 @c Q in pending mail to Gilmore. ---pesch@cygnus.com, 26mar91
2601 @c some light may be shed by looking at instances of
2602 @c ONE_PROCESS_WRITETEXT. But error message seems possible otherwise
2603 @c too. pesch, 20sep91
2604 Under some operating systems, breakpoints cannot be used in a program if
2605 any other process is running that program. In this situation,
2606 attempting to run or continue a program with a breakpoint causes @value{GDBN}
2607 to stop the other process.
2608
2609 When this happens, you have three ways to proceed:
2610
2611 @enumerate
2612 @item
2613 Remove or disable the breakpoints, then continue.
2614
2615 @item
2616 Suspend @value{GDBN}, and copy the file containing your program to a new name.
2617 Resume @value{GDBN} and use the @code{exec-file} command to specify that @value{GDBN}
2618 should run your program under that name. Then start your program again.
2619
2620 @c FIXME: RMS commented here "Show example". Maybe when someone
2621 @c explains the first FIXME: in this section...
2622
2623 @item
2624 Relink your program so that the text segment is nonsharable, using the
2625 linker option @samp{-N}. The operating system limitation may not apply
2626 to nonsharable executables.
2627 @end enumerate
2628 @end ifclear
2629
2630 @node Continuing and Stepping
2631 @section Continuing and stepping
2632
2633 @cindex stepping
2634 @cindex continuing
2635 @cindex resuming execution
2636 @dfn{Continuing} means resuming program execution until your program
2637 completes normally. In contrast, @dfn{stepping} means executing just
2638 one more ``step'' of your program, where ``step'' may mean either one
2639 line of source code, or one machine instruction (depending on what
2640 particular command you use). Either when continuing
2641 or when stepping, your program may stop even sooner, due to
2642 @ifset BARETARGET
2643 a breakpoint.
2644 @end ifset
2645 @ifclear BARETARGET
2646 a breakpoint or to a signal. (If due to a signal, you may want to use
2647 @code{handle}, or use @samp{signal 0} to resume execution.
2648 @xref{Signals, ,Signals}.)
2649 @end ifclear
2650
2651 @table @code
2652 @item continue @r{[}@var{count}@r{]}
2653 @itemx c @r{[}@var{count}@r{]}
2654 @itemx fg @r{[}@var{count}@r{]}
2655 @kindex continue
2656 @kindex c
2657 @kindex fg
2658 Resume program execution, at the address where your program last
2659 stopped; any breakpoints set at that address are bypassed. The optional
2660 argument @var{count} means to set the ignore count of a breakpoint which
2661 you are stopped at to @var{count} @minus{} 1, just like the @code{ignore}
2662 command (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions}). This means that the
2663 program does not stop at that breakpoint until the @var{count}th time
2664 it is hit.
2665
2666 The argument @var{count} is meaningful only when your program
2667 stopped due to a breakpoint. At other times, the argument to
2668 @code{continue} is ignored.
2669
2670 The synonyms @code{c} and @code{fg} are provided purely for convenience,
2671 and have exactly the same behavior as @code{continue}.
2672 @end table
2673
2674 To resume execution at a different place, you can use @code{return}
2675 (@pxref{Returning, ,Returning from a function}) to go back to the
2676 calling function; or @code{jump} (@pxref{Jumping, ,Continuing at a
2677 different address}) to go to an arbitrary location in your program.
2678
2679 A typical technique for using stepping is to set a breakpoint
2680 @ifclear CONLY
2681 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints; watchpoints; and exceptions})
2682 @end ifclear
2683 @ifset CONLY
2684 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints and watchpoints})
2685 @end ifset
2686 at the
2687 beginning of the function or the section of your program where a
2688 problem is believed to lie, run your program until it stops at that
2689 breakpoint, and then step through the suspect area, examining the
2690 variables that are interesting, until you see the problem happen.
2691
2692 @table @code
2693 @item step
2694 @kindex step
2695 @kindex s
2696 Continue running your program until control reaches a different source
2697 line, then stop it and return control to @value{GDBN}. This command is
2698 abbreviated @code{s}.
2699
2700 @quotation
2701 @emph{Warning:} If you use the @code{step} command while control is
2702 within a function that was compiled without debugging information,
2703 execution proceeds until control reaches a function that does have
2704 debugging information.
2705 @end quotation
2706
2707 @item step @var{count}
2708 Continue running as in @code{step}, but do so @var{count} times. If a
2709 breakpoint is reached,
2710 @ifclear BARETARGET
2711 or a signal not related to stepping occurs before @var{count} steps,
2712 @end ifclear
2713 stepping stops right away.
2714
2715 @item next @r{[}@var{count}@r{]}
2716 @kindex next
2717 @kindex n
2718 Continue to the next source line in the current (innermost) stack frame.
2719 Similar to @code{step}, but any function calls appearing within the line
2720 of code are executed without stopping. Execution stops when control
2721 reaches a different line of code at the stack level which was executing
2722 when the @code{next} command was given. This command is abbreviated
2723 @code{n}.
2724
2725 An argument @var{count} is a repeat count, as for @code{step}.
2726
2727 @code{next} within a function that lacks debugging information acts like
2728 @code{step}, but any function calls appearing within the code of the
2729 function are executed without stopping.
2730
2731 @item finish
2732 @kindex finish
2733 Continue running until just after function in the selected stack frame
2734 returns. Print the returned value (if any).
2735
2736 Contrast this with the @code{return} command (@pxref{Returning,
2737 ,Returning from a function}).
2738
2739 @item until
2740 @kindex until
2741 @item u
2742 @kindex u
2743 Continue running until a source line past the current line, in the
2744 current stack frame, is reached. This command is used to avoid single
2745 stepping through a loop more than once. It is like the @code{next}
2746 command, except that when @code{until} encounters a jump, it
2747 automatically continues execution until the program counter is greater
2748 than the address of the jump.
2749
2750 This means that when you reach the end of a loop after single stepping
2751 though it, @code{until} will cause your program to continue execution
2752 until the loop is exited. In contrast, a @code{next} command at the end
2753 of a loop will simply step back to the beginning of the loop, which
2754 would force you to step through the next iteration.
2755
2756 @code{until} always stops your program if it attempts to exit the current
2757 stack frame.
2758
2759 @code{until} may produce somewhat counterintuitive results if the order
2760 of machine code does not match the order of the source lines. For
2761 example, in the following excerpt from a debugging session, the @code{f}
2762 (@code{frame}) command shows that execution is stopped at line
2763 @code{206}; yet when we use @code{until}, we get to line @code{195}:
2764
2765 @example
2766 (@value{GDBP}) f
2767 #0 main (argc=4, argv=0xf7fffae8) at m4.c:206
2768 206 expand_input();
2769 (@value{GDBP}) until
2770 195 for ( ; argc > 0; NEXTARG) @{
2771 @end example
2772
2773 This happened because, for execution efficiency, the compiler had
2774 generated code for the loop closure test at the end, rather than the
2775 start, of the loop---even though the test in a C @code{for}-loop is
2776 written before the body of the loop. The @code{until} command appeared
2777 to step back to the beginning of the loop when it advanced to this
2778 expression; however, it has not really gone to an earlier
2779 statement---not in terms of the actual machine code.
2780
2781 @code{until} with no argument works by means of single
2782 instruction stepping, and hence is slower than @code{until} with an
2783 argument.
2784
2785 @item until @var{location}
2786 @item u @var{location}
2787 Continue running your program until either the specified location is
2788 reached, or the current stack frame returns. @var{location} is any of
2789 the forms of argument acceptable to @code{break} (@pxref{Set Breaks,
2790 ,Setting breakpoints}). This form of the command uses breakpoints,
2791 and hence is quicker than @code{until} without an argument.
2792
2793 @item stepi
2794 @itemx si
2795 @kindex stepi
2796 @kindex si
2797 Execute one machine instruction, then stop and return to the debugger.
2798
2799 It is often useful to do @samp{display/i $pc} when stepping by machine
2800 instructions. This will cause the next instruction to be executed to
2801 be displayed automatically at each stop. @xref{Auto Display,
2802 ,Automatic display}.
2803
2804 An argument is a repeat count, as in @code{step}.
2805
2806 @need 750
2807 @item nexti
2808 @itemx ni
2809 @kindex nexti
2810 @kindex ni
2811 Execute one machine instruction, but if it is a function call,
2812 proceed until the function returns.
2813
2814 An argument is a repeat count, as in @code{next}.
2815 @end table
2816
2817 @ifset POSIX
2818 @node Signals
2819 @section Signals
2820 @cindex signals
2821
2822 A signal is an asynchronous event that can happen in a program. The
2823 operating system defines the possible kinds of signals, and gives each
2824 kind a name and a number. For example, in Unix @code{SIGINT} is the
2825 signal a program gets when you type an interrupt (often @kbd{C-c});
2826 @code{SIGSEGV} is the signal a program gets from referencing a place in
2827 memory far away from all the areas in use; @code{SIGALRM} occurs when
2828 the alarm clock timer goes off (which happens only if your program has
2829 requested an alarm).
2830
2831 @cindex fatal signals
2832 Some signals, including @code{SIGALRM}, are a normal part of the
2833 functioning of your program. Others, such as @code{SIGSEGV}, indicate
2834 errors; these signals are @dfn{fatal} (kill your program immediately) if the
2835 program has not specified in advance some other way to handle the signal.
2836 @code{SIGINT} does not indicate an error in your program, but it is normally
2837 fatal so it can carry out the purpose of the interrupt: to kill the program.
2838
2839 @value{GDBN} has the ability to detect any occurrence of a signal in your
2840 program. You can tell @value{GDBN} in advance what to do for each kind of
2841 signal.
2842
2843 @cindex handling signals
2844 Normally, @value{GDBN} is set up to ignore non-erroneous signals like @code{SIGALRM}
2845 (so as not to interfere with their role in the functioning of your program)
2846 but to stop your program immediately whenever an error signal happens.
2847 You can change these settings with the @code{handle} command.
2848
2849 @table @code
2850 @item info signals
2851 @kindex info signals
2852 Print a table of all the kinds of signals and how @value{GDBN} has been told to
2853 handle each one. You can use this to see the signal numbers of all
2854 the defined types of signals.
2855
2856 @item handle @var{signal} @var{keywords}@dots{}
2857 @kindex handle
2858 Change the way @value{GDBN} handles signal @var{signal}. @var{signal} can be the
2859 number of a signal or its name (with or without the @samp{SIG} at the
2860 beginning). The @var{keywords} say what change to make.
2861 @end table
2862
2863 @c @group
2864 The keywords allowed by the @code{handle} command can be abbreviated.
2865 Their full names are:
2866
2867 @table @code
2868 @item nostop
2869 @value{GDBN} should not stop your program when this signal happens. It may
2870 still print a message telling you that the signal has come in.
2871
2872 @item stop
2873 @value{GDBN} should stop your program when this signal happens. This implies
2874 the @code{print} keyword as well.
2875
2876 @item print
2877 @value{GDBN} should print a message when this signal happens.
2878
2879 @item noprint
2880 @value{GDBN} should not mention the occurrence of the signal at all. This
2881 implies the @code{nostop} keyword as well.
2882
2883 @item pass
2884 @value{GDBN} should allow your program to see this signal; your program will be
2885 able to handle the signal, or may be terminated if the signal is fatal
2886 and not handled.
2887
2888 @item nopass
2889 @value{GDBN} should not allow your program to see this signal.
2890 @end table
2891 @c @end group
2892
2893 When a signal stops your program, the signal is not visible until you
2894 continue. Your program will see the signal then, if @code{pass} is in
2895 effect for the signal in question @emph{at that time}. In other words,
2896 after @value{GDBN} reports a signal, you can use the @code{handle}
2897 command with @code{pass} or @code{nopass} to control whether that
2898 signal will be seen by your program when you later continue it.
2899
2900 You can also use the @code{signal} command to prevent your program from
2901 seeing a signal, or cause it to see a signal it normally would not see,
2902 or to give it any signal at any time. For example, if your program stopped
2903 due to some sort of memory reference error, you might store correct
2904 values into the erroneous variables and continue, hoping to see more
2905 execution; but your program would probably terminate immediately as
2906 a result of the fatal signal once it saw the signal. To prevent this,
2907 you can continue with @samp{signal 0}. @xref{Signaling, ,Giving your
2908 program a signal}.
2909 @end ifset
2910
2911 @node Stack
2912 @chapter Examining the Stack
2913
2914 When your program has stopped, the first thing you need to know is where it
2915 stopped and how it got there.
2916
2917 @cindex call stack
2918 Each time your program performs a function call, the information about
2919 where in your program the call was made from is saved in a block of data
2920 called a @dfn{stack frame}. The frame also contains the arguments of the
2921 call and the local variables of the function that was called. All the
2922 stack frames are allocated in a region of memory called the @dfn{call
2923 stack}.
2924
2925 When your program stops, the @value{GDBN} commands for examining the
2926 stack allow you to see all of this information.
2927
2928 @cindex selected frame
2929 One of the stack frames is @dfn{selected} by @value{GDBN} and many
2930 @value{GDBN} commands refer implicitly to the selected frame. In
2931 particular, whenever you ask @value{GDBN} for the value of a variable in
2932 your program, the value is found in the selected frame. There are
2933 special @value{GDBN} commands to select whichever frame you are
2934 interested in.
2935
2936 When your program stops, @value{GDBN} automatically selects the
2937 currently executing frame and describes it briefly as the @code{frame}
2938 command does (@pxref{Frame Info, ,Information about a frame}).
2939
2940 @menu
2941 * Frames:: Stack frames
2942 * Backtrace:: Backtraces
2943 * Selection:: Selecting a frame
2944 * Frame Info:: Information on a frame
2945 @ifset MIPS
2946 * MIPS Stack:: MIPS machines and the function stack
2947 @end ifset
2948 @end menu
2949
2950 @node Frames
2951 @section Stack frames
2952
2953 @cindex frame
2954 @cindex stack frame
2955 The call stack is divided up into contiguous pieces called @dfn{stack
2956 frames}, or @dfn{frames} for short; each frame is the data associated
2957 with one call to one function. The frame contains the arguments given
2958 to the function, the function's local variables, and the address at
2959 which the function is executing.
2960
2961 @cindex initial frame
2962 @cindex outermost frame
2963 @cindex innermost frame
2964 When your program is started, the stack has only one frame, that of the
2965 function @code{main}. This is called the @dfn{initial} frame or the
2966 @dfn{outermost} frame. Each time a function is called, a new frame is
2967 made. Each time a function returns, the frame for that function invocation
2968 is eliminated. If a function is recursive, there can be many frames for
2969 the same function. The frame for the function in which execution is
2970 actually occurring is called the @dfn{innermost} frame. This is the most
2971 recently created of all the stack frames that still exist.
2972
2973 @cindex frame pointer
2974 Inside your program, stack frames are identified by their addresses. A
2975 stack frame consists of many bytes, each of which has its own address; each
2976 kind of computer has a convention for choosing one of those bytes whose
2977 address serves as the address of the frame. Usually this address is kept
2978 in a register called the @dfn{frame pointer register} while execution is
2979 going on in that frame.
2980
2981 @cindex frame number
2982 @value{GDBN} assigns numbers to all existing stack frames, starting with
2983 zero for the innermost frame, one for the frame that called it,
2984 and so on upward. These numbers do not really exist in your program;
2985 they are assigned by @value{GDBN} to give you a way of designating stack
2986 frames in @value{GDBN} commands.
2987
2988 @cindex frameless execution
2989 Some compilers provide a way to compile functions so that they operate
2990 without stack frames. (For example, the @code{@value{GCC}} option
2991 @samp{-fomit-frame-pointer} will generate functions without a frame.)
2992 This is occasionally done with heavily used library functions to save
2993 the frame setup time. @value{GDBN} has limited facilities for dealing
2994 with these function invocations. If the innermost function invocation
2995 has no stack frame, @value{GDBN} will nevertheless regard it as though
2996 it had a separate frame, which is numbered zero as usual, allowing
2997 correct tracing of the function call chain. However, @value{GDBN} has
2998 no provision for frameless functions elsewhere in the stack.
2999
3000 @node Backtrace
3001 @section Backtraces
3002
3003 A backtrace is a summary of how your program got where it is. It shows one
3004 line per frame, for many frames, starting with the currently executing
3005 frame (frame zero), followed by its caller (frame one), and on up the
3006 stack.
3007
3008 @table @code
3009 @item backtrace
3010 @itemx bt
3011 @kindex backtrace
3012 @kindex bt
3013 Print a backtrace of the entire stack: one line per frame for all
3014 frames in the stack.
3015
3016 You can stop the backtrace at any time by typing the system interrupt
3017 character, normally @kbd{C-c}.
3018
3019 @item backtrace @var{n}
3020 @itemx bt @var{n}
3021 Similar, but print only the innermost @var{n} frames.
3022
3023 @item backtrace -@var{n}
3024 @itemx bt -@var{n}
3025 Similar, but print only the outermost @var{n} frames.
3026 @end table
3027
3028 @kindex where
3029 @kindex info stack
3030 @kindex info s
3031 The names @code{where} and @code{info stack} (abbreviated @code{info s})
3032 are additional aliases for @code{backtrace}.
3033
3034 Each line in the backtrace shows the frame number and the function name.
3035 The program counter value is also shown---unless you use @code{set
3036 print address off}. The backtrace also shows the source file name and
3037 line number, as well as the arguments to the function. The program
3038 counter value is omitted if it is at the beginning of the code for that
3039 line number.
3040
3041 Here is an example of a backtrace. It was made with the command
3042 @samp{bt 3}, so it shows the innermost three frames.
3043
3044 @smallexample
3045 @group
3046 #0 m4_traceon (obs=0x24eb0, argc=1, argv=0x2b8c8)
3047 at builtin.c:993
3048 #1 0x6e38 in expand_macro (sym=0x2b600) at macro.c:242
3049 #2 0x6840 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=177664, td=0xf7fffb08)
3050 at macro.c:71
3051 (More stack frames follow...)
3052 @end group
3053 @end smallexample
3054
3055 @noindent
3056 The display for frame zero does not begin with a program counter
3057 value, indicating that your program has stopped at the beginning of the
3058 code for line @code{993} of @code{builtin.c}.
3059
3060 @node Selection
3061 @section Selecting a frame
3062
3063 Most commands for examining the stack and other data in your program work on
3064 whichever stack frame is selected at the moment. Here are the commands for
3065 selecting a stack frame; all of them finish by printing a brief description
3066 of the stack frame just selected.
3067
3068 @table @code
3069 @item frame @var{n}
3070 @itemx f @var{n}
3071 @kindex frame
3072 @kindex f
3073 Select frame number @var{n}. Recall that frame zero is the innermost
3074 (currently executing) frame, frame one is the frame that called the
3075 innermost one, and so on. The highest-numbered frame is the one for
3076 @code{main}.
3077
3078 @item frame @var{addr}
3079 @itemx f @var{addr}
3080 Select the frame at address @var{addr}. This is useful mainly if the
3081 chaining of stack frames has been damaged by a bug, making it
3082 impossible for @value{GDBN} to assign numbers properly to all frames. In
3083 addition, this can be useful when your program has multiple stacks and
3084 switches between them.
3085
3086 @ifset SPARC
3087 On the SPARC architecture, @code{frame} needs two addresses to
3088 select an arbitrary frame: a frame pointer and a stack pointer.
3089 @c note to future updaters: this is conditioned on a flag
3090 @c FRAME_SPECIFICATION_DYADIC in the tm-*.h files, currently only used
3091 @c by SPARC, hence the specific attribution. Generalize or list all
3092 @c possibilities if more supported machines start doing this.
3093 @end ifset
3094
3095 @item up @var{n}
3096 @kindex up
3097 Move @var{n} frames up the stack. For positive numbers @var{n}, this
3098 advances toward the outermost frame, to higher frame numbers, to frames
3099 that have existed longer. @var{n} defaults to one.
3100
3101 @item down @var{n}
3102 @kindex down
3103 @kindex do
3104 Move @var{n} frames down the stack. For positive numbers @var{n}, this
3105 advances toward the innermost frame, to lower frame numbers, to frames
3106 that were created more recently. @var{n} defaults to one. You may
3107 abbreviate @code{down} as @code{do}.
3108 @end table
3109
3110 All of these commands end by printing two lines of output describing the
3111 frame. The first line shows the frame number, the function name, the
3112 arguments, and the source file and line number of execution in that
3113 frame. The second line shows the text of that source line.
3114
3115 For example:
3116 @smallexample
3117 @group
3118 (@value{GDBP}) up
3119 #1 0x22f0 in main (argc=1, argv=0xf7fffbf4, env=0xf7fffbfc)
3120 at env.c:10
3121 10 read_input_file (argv[i]);
3122 @end group
3123 @end smallexample
3124
3125 After such a printout, the @code{list} command with no arguments will
3126 print ten lines centered on the point of execution in the frame.
3127 @xref{List, ,Printing source lines}.
3128
3129 @table @code
3130 @item up-silently @var{n}
3131 @itemx down-silently @var{n}
3132 @kindex down-silently
3133 @kindex up-silently
3134 These two commands are variants of @code{up} and @code{down},
3135 respectively; they differ in that they do their work silently, without
3136 causing display of the new frame. They are intended primarily for use
3137 in @value{GDBN} command scripts, where the output might be unnecessary and
3138 distracting.
3139 @end table
3140
3141 @node Frame Info
3142 @section Information about a frame
3143
3144 There are several other commands to print information about the selected
3145 stack frame.
3146
3147 @table @code
3148 @item frame
3149 @itemx f
3150 When used without any argument, this command does not change which
3151 frame is selected, but prints a brief description of the currently
3152 selected stack frame. It can be abbreviated @code{f}. With an
3153 argument, this command is used to select a stack frame.
3154 @xref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}.
3155
3156 @item info frame
3157 @itemx info f
3158 @kindex info frame
3159 @kindex info f
3160 This command prints a verbose description of the selected stack frame,
3161 including the address of the frame, the addresses of the next frame down
3162 (called by this frame) and the next frame up (caller of this frame), the
3163 language that the source code corresponding to this frame was written in,
3164 the address of the frame's arguments, the program counter saved in it
3165 (the address of execution in the caller frame), and which registers
3166 were saved in the frame. The verbose description is useful when
3167 something has gone wrong that has made the stack format fail to fit
3168 the usual conventions.
3169
3170 @item info frame @var{addr}
3171 @itemx info f @var{addr}
3172 Print a verbose description of the frame at address @var{addr},
3173 without selecting that frame. The selected frame remains unchanged by
3174 this command.
3175
3176 @item info args
3177 @kindex info args
3178 Print the arguments of the selected frame, each on a separate line.
3179
3180 @item info locals
3181 @kindex info locals
3182 Print the local variables of the selected frame, each on a separate
3183 line. These are all variables (declared either static or automatic)
3184 accessible at the point of execution of the selected frame.
3185
3186 @ifclear CONLY
3187 @item info catch
3188 @kindex info catch
3189 @cindex catch exceptions
3190 @cindex exception handlers
3191 Print a list of all the exception handlers that are active in the
3192 current stack frame at the current point of execution. To see other
3193 exception handlers, visit the associated frame (using the @code{up},
3194 @code{down}, or @code{frame} commands); then type @code{info catch}.
3195 @xref{Exception Handling, ,Breakpoints and exceptions}.
3196 @end ifclear
3197 @end table
3198
3199 @ifset MIPS
3200 @node MIPS Stack
3201 @section MIPS machines and the function stack
3202
3203 @cindex stack on MIPS
3204 @cindex MIPS stack
3205 MIPS based computers use an unusual stack frame, which sometimes
3206 requires @value{GDBN} to search backward in the object code to find the
3207 beginning of a function.
3208
3209 @cindex response time, MIPS debugging
3210 To improve response time (especially for embedded applications, where
3211 @value{GDBN} may be restricted to a slow serial line for this search)
3212 you may want to limit the size of this search, using one of these
3213 commands:
3214 @c FIXME! So what happens when GDB does *not* find the beginning of a
3215 @c function?
3216
3217 @cindex @code{heuristic-fence-post} (MIPS)
3218 @table @code
3219 @item set heuristic-fence-post @var{limit}
3220 Restrict @var{GDBN} to examining at most @var{limit} bytes in its search
3221 for the beginning of a function. A value of @code{0} (the default)
3222 means there is no limit.
3223
3224 @item show heuristic-fence-post
3225 Display the current limit.
3226 @end table
3227
3228 @noindent
3229 These commands are available @emph{only} when @value{GDBN} is configured
3230 for debugging programs on MIPS processors.
3231 @end ifset
3232
3233 @node Source
3234 @chapter Examining Source Files
3235
3236 @value{GDBN} can print parts of your program's source, since the debugging
3237 information recorded in the program tells @value{GDBN} what source files were
3238 used to build it. When your program stops, @value{GDBN} spontaneously prints
3239 the line where it stopped. Likewise, when you select a stack frame
3240 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}), @value{GDBN} prints the line where
3241 execution in that frame has stopped. You can print other portions of
3242 source files by explicit command.
3243
3244 @ifclear DOSHOST
3245 If you use @value{GDBN} through its GNU Emacs interface, you may prefer to use
3246 Emacs facilities to view source; @pxref{Emacs, ,Using @value{GDBN} under GNU
3247 Emacs}.
3248 @end ifclear
3249
3250 @menu
3251 * List:: Printing source lines
3252 @ifclear DOSHOST
3253 * Search:: Searching source files
3254 @end ifclear
3255
3256 * Source Path:: Specifying source directories
3257 * Machine Code:: Source and machine code
3258 @end menu
3259
3260 @node List
3261 @section Printing source lines
3262
3263 @kindex list
3264 @kindex l
3265 To print lines from a source file, use the @code{list} command
3266 (abbreviated @code{l}). There are several ways to specify what part
3267 of the file you want to print.
3268
3269 Here are the forms of the @code{list} command most commonly used:
3270
3271 @table @code
3272 @item list @var{linenum}
3273 Print lines centered around line number @var{linenum} in the
3274 current source file.
3275
3276 @item list @var{function}
3277 Print lines centered around the beginning of function
3278 @var{function}.
3279
3280 @item list
3281 Print more lines. If the last lines printed were printed with a
3282 @code{list} command, this prints lines following the last lines
3283 printed; however, if the last line printed was a solitary line printed
3284 as part of displaying a stack frame (@pxref{Stack, ,Examining the
3285 Stack}), this prints lines centered around that line.
3286
3287 @item list -
3288 Print lines just before the lines last printed.
3289 @end table
3290
3291 By default, @value{GDBN} prints ten source lines with any of these forms of
3292 the @code{list} command. You can change this using @code{set listsize}:
3293
3294 @table @code
3295 @item set listsize @var{count}
3296 @kindex set listsize
3297 Make the @code{list} command display @var{count} source lines (unless
3298 the @code{list} argument explicitly specifies some other number).
3299
3300 @item show listsize
3301 @kindex show listsize
3302 Display the number of lines that @code{list} will currently display by
3303 default.
3304 @end table
3305
3306 Repeating a @code{list} command with @key{RET} discards the argument,
3307 so it is equivalent to typing just @code{list}. This is more useful
3308 than listing the same lines again. An exception is made for an
3309 argument of @samp{-}; that argument is preserved in repetition so that
3310 each repetition moves up in the source file.
3311
3312 @cindex linespec
3313 In general, the @code{list} command expects you to supply zero, one or two
3314 @dfn{linespecs}. Linespecs specify source lines; there are several ways
3315 of writing them but the effect is always to specify some source line.
3316 Here is a complete description of the possible arguments for @code{list}:
3317
3318 @table @code
3319 @item list @var{linespec}
3320 Print lines centered around the line specified by @var{linespec}.
3321
3322 @item list @var{first},@var{last}
3323 Print lines from @var{first} to @var{last}. Both arguments are
3324 linespecs.
3325
3326 @item list ,@var{last}
3327 Print lines ending with @var{last}.
3328
3329 @item list @var{first},
3330 Print lines starting with @var{first}.
3331
3332 @item list +
3333 Print lines just after the lines last printed.
3334
3335 @item list -
3336 Print lines just before the lines last printed.
3337
3338 @item list
3339 As described in the preceding table.
3340 @end table
3341
3342 Here are the ways of specifying a single source line---all the
3343 kinds of linespec.
3344
3345 @table @code
3346 @item @var{number}
3347 Specifies line @var{number} of the current source file.
3348 When a @code{list} command has two linespecs, this refers to
3349 the same source file as the first linespec.
3350
3351 @item +@var{offset}
3352 Specifies the line @var{offset} lines after the last line printed.
3353 When used as the second linespec in a @code{list} command that has
3354 two, this specifies the line @var{offset} lines down from the
3355 first linespec.
3356
3357 @item -@var{offset}
3358 Specifies the line @var{offset} lines before the last line printed.
3359
3360 @item @var{filename}:@var{number}
3361 Specifies line @var{number} in the source file @var{filename}.
3362
3363 @item @var{function}
3364 @c FIXME: "of the open-brace" is C-centric. When we add other langs...
3365 Specifies the line of the open-brace that begins the body of the
3366 function @var{function}.
3367
3368 @item @var{filename}:@var{function}
3369 Specifies the line of the open-brace that begins the body of the
3370 function @var{function} in the file @var{filename}. You only need the
3371 file name with a function name to avoid ambiguity when there are
3372 identically named functions in different source files.
3373
3374 @item *@var{address}
3375 Specifies the line containing the program address @var{address}.
3376 @var{address} may be any expression.
3377 @end table
3378
3379 @ifclear DOSHOST
3380 @node Search
3381 @section Searching source files
3382 @cindex searching
3383 @kindex reverse-search
3384
3385 There are two commands for searching through the current source file for a
3386 regular expression.
3387
3388 @table @code
3389 @item forward-search @var{regexp}
3390 @itemx search @var{regexp}
3391 @kindex search
3392 @kindex forward-search
3393 The command @samp{forward-search @var{regexp}} checks each line,
3394 starting with the one following the last line listed, for a match for
3395 @var{regexp}. It lists the line that is found. You can use
3396 synonym @samp{search @var{regexp}} or abbreviate the command name as
3397 @code{fo}.
3398
3399 @item reverse-search @var{regexp}
3400 The command @samp{reverse-search @var{regexp}} checks each line, starting
3401 with the one before the last line listed and going backward, for a match
3402 for @var{regexp}. It lists the line that is found. You can abbreviate
3403 this command as @code{rev}.
3404 @end table
3405 @end ifclear
3406
3407 @node Source Path
3408 @section Specifying source directories
3409
3410 @cindex source path
3411 @cindex directories for source files
3412 Executable programs sometimes do not record the directories of the source
3413 files from which they were compiled, just the names. Even when they do,
3414 the directories could be moved between the compilation and your debugging
3415 session. @value{GDBN} has a list of directories to search for source files;
3416 this is called the @dfn{source path}. Each time @value{GDBN} wants a source file,
3417 it tries all the directories in the list, in the order they are present
3418 in the list, until it finds a file with the desired name. Note that
3419 the executable search path is @emph{not} used for this purpose. Neither is
3420 the current working directory, unless it happens to be in the source
3421 path.
3422
3423 If @value{GDBN} cannot find a source file in the source path, and the object
3424 program records a directory, @value{GDBN} tries that directory too. If the
3425 source path is empty, and there is no record of the compilation
3426 directory, @value{GDBN} will, as a last resort, look in the current
3427 directory.
3428
3429 Whenever you reset or rearrange the source path, @value{GDBN} will clear out
3430 any information it has cached about where source files are found, where
3431 each line is in the file, etc.
3432
3433 @kindex directory
3434 When you start @value{GDBN}, its source path is empty.
3435 To add other directories, use the @code{directory} command.
3436
3437 @table @code
3438 @item directory @var{dirname} @dots{}
3439 Add directory @var{dirname} to the front of the source path. Several
3440 directory names may be given to this command, separated by @samp{:} or
3441 whitespace. You may specify a directory that is already in the source
3442 path; this moves it forward, so it will be searched sooner.
3443
3444 You can use the string @samp{$cdir} to refer to the compilation
3445 directory (if one is recorded), and @samp{$cwd} to refer to the current
3446 working directory. @samp{$cwd} is not the same as @samp{.}---the former
3447 tracks the current working directory as it changes during your @value{GDBN}
3448 session, while the latter is immediately expanded to the current
3449 directory at the time you add an entry to the source path.
3450
3451 @item directory
3452 Reset the source path to empty again. This requires confirmation.
3453
3454 @c RET-repeat for @code{directory} is explicitly disabled, but since
3455 @c repeating it would be a no-op we do not say that. (thanks to RMS)
3456
3457 @item show directories
3458 @kindex show directories
3459 Print the source path: show which directories it contains.
3460 @end table
3461
3462 If your source path is cluttered with directories that are no longer of
3463 interest, @value{GDBN} may sometimes cause confusion by finding the wrong
3464 versions of source. You can correct the situation as follows:
3465
3466 @enumerate
3467 @item
3468 Use @code{directory} with no argument to reset the source path to empty.
3469
3470 @item
3471 Use @code{directory} with suitable arguments to reinstall the
3472 directories you want in the source path. You can add all the
3473 directories in one command.
3474 @end enumerate
3475
3476 @node Machine Code
3477 @section Source and machine code
3478
3479 You can use the command @code{info line} to map source lines to program
3480 addresses (and vice versa), and the command @code{disassemble} to display
3481 a range of addresses as machine instructions.
3482
3483 @table @code
3484 @item info line @var{linespec}
3485 @kindex info line
3486 Print the starting and ending addresses of the compiled code for
3487 source line @var{linespec}. You can specify source lines in any of
3488 the ways understood by the @code{list} command (@pxref{List, ,Printing
3489 source lines}).
3490 @end table
3491
3492 For example, we can use @code{info line} to discover the location of
3493 the object code for the first line of function
3494 @code{m4_changequote}:
3495
3496 @smallexample
3497 (@value{GDBP}) info line m4_changecom
3498 Line 895 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x634c and ends at 0x6350.
3499 @end smallexample
3500
3501 @noindent
3502 We can also inquire (using @code{*@var{addr}} as the form for
3503 @var{linespec}) what source line covers a particular address:
3504 @smallexample
3505 (@value{GDBP}) info line *0x63ff
3506 Line 926 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x63e4 and ends at 0x6404.
3507 @end smallexample
3508
3509 @cindex @code{$_} and @code{info line}
3510 After @code{info line}, the default address for the @code{x} command
3511 is changed to the starting address of the line, so that @samp{x/i} is
3512 sufficient to begin examining the machine code (@pxref{Memory,
3513 ,Examining memory}). Also, this address is saved as the value of the
3514 convenience variable @code{$_} (@pxref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
3515 variables}).
3516
3517 @table @code
3518 @kindex disassemble
3519 @item disassemble
3520 @cindex assembly instructions
3521 @cindex instructions, assembly
3522 @cindex machine instructions
3523 @cindex listing machine instructions
3524 This specialized command dumps a range of memory as machine
3525 instructions. The default memory range is the function surrounding the
3526 program counter of the selected frame. A single argument to this
3527 command is a program counter value; the function surrounding this value
3528 will be dumped. Two arguments specify a range of addresses (first
3529 inclusive, second exclusive) to dump.
3530 @end table
3531
3532 @ifclear H8EXCLUSIVE
3533 We can use @code{disassemble} to inspect the object code
3534 range shown in the last @code{info line} example (the example
3535 shows SPARC machine instructions):
3536
3537
3538 @smallexample
3539 (@value{GDBP}) disas 0x63e4 0x6404
3540 Dump of assembler code from 0x63e4 to 0x6404:
3541 0x63e4 <builtin_init+5340>: ble 0x63f8 <builtin_init+5360>
3542 0x63e8 <builtin_init+5344>: sethi %hi(0x4c00), %o0
3543 0x63ec <builtin_init+5348>: ld [%i1+4], %o0
3544 0x63f0 <builtin_init+5352>: b 0x63fc <builtin_init+5364>
3545 0x63f4 <builtin_init+5356>: ld [%o0+4], %o0
3546 0x63f8 <builtin_init+5360>: or %o0, 0x1a4, %o0
3547 0x63fc <builtin_init+5364>: call 0x9288 <path_search>
3548 0x6400 <builtin_init+5368>: nop
3549 End of assembler dump.
3550 @end smallexample
3551 @end ifclear
3552
3553 @ifset H8EXCLUSIVE
3554 For example, here is the beginning of the output for the
3555 disassembly of a function @code{fact}:
3556
3557
3558 @smallexample
3559 (@value{GDBP}) disas fact
3560 Dump of assembler code for function fact:
3561 to 0x808c:
3562 0x802c <fact>: 6d f2 mov.w r2,@@-r7
3563 0x802e <fact+2>: 6d f3 mov.w r3,@@-r7
3564 0x8030 <fact+4>: 6d f6 mov.w r6,@@-r7
3565 0x8032 <fact+6>: 0d 76 mov.w r7,r6
3566 0x8034 <fact+8>: 6f 70 00 08 mov.w @@(0x8,r7),r0
3567 0x8038 <fact+12> 19 11 sub.w r1,r1
3568 .
3569 .
3570 .
3571 @end smallexample
3572 @end ifset
3573
3574 @node Data
3575 @chapter Examining Data
3576
3577 @cindex printing data
3578 @cindex examining data
3579 @kindex print
3580 @kindex inspect
3581 @c "inspect" is not quite a synonym if you are using Epoch, which we do not
3582 @c document because it is nonstandard... Under Epoch it displays in a
3583 @c different window or something like that.
3584 The usual way to examine data in your program is with the @code{print}
3585 command (abbreviated @code{p}), or its synonym @code{inspect}.
3586 @ifclear CONLY
3587 It evaluates and prints the value of an expression of the language your
3588 program is written in (@pxref{Languages, ,Using @value{GDBN} with Different
3589 Languages}).
3590 @end ifclear
3591
3592 @table @code
3593 @item print @var{exp}
3594 @itemx print /@var{f} @var{exp}
3595 @var{exp} is an expression (in the source language). By default the
3596 value of @var{exp} is printed in a format appropriate to its data type;
3597 you can choose a different format by specifying @samp{/@var{f}}, where
3598 @var{f} is a letter specifying the format; @pxref{Output Formats,,Output
3599 formats}.
3600
3601 @item print
3602 @itemx print /@var{f}
3603 If you omit @var{exp}, @value{GDBN} displays the last value again (from the
3604 @dfn{value history}; @pxref{Value History, ,Value history}). This allows you to
3605 conveniently inspect the same value in an alternative format.
3606 @end table
3607
3608 A more low-level way of examining data is with the @code{x} command.
3609 It examines data in memory at a specified address and prints it in a
3610 specified format. @xref{Memory, ,Examining memory}.
3611
3612 If you are interested in information about types, or about how the fields
3613 of a struct
3614 @ifclear CONLY
3615 or class
3616 @end ifclear
3617 are declared, use the @code{ptype @var{exp}}
3618 command rather than @code{print}. @xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}.
3619
3620 @menu
3621 * Expressions:: Expressions
3622 * Variables:: Program variables
3623 * Arrays:: Artificial arrays
3624 * Output Formats:: Output formats
3625 * Memory:: Examining memory
3626 * Auto Display:: Automatic display
3627 * Print Settings:: Print settings
3628 * Value History:: Value history
3629 * Convenience Vars:: Convenience variables
3630 * Registers:: Registers
3631 @ifclear HAVE-FLOAT
3632 * Floating Point Hardware:: Floating point hardware
3633 @end ifclear
3634 @end menu
3635
3636 @node Expressions
3637 @section Expressions
3638
3639 @cindex expressions
3640 @code{print} and many other @value{GDBN} commands accept an expression and
3641 compute its value. Any kind of constant, variable or operator defined
3642 by the programming language you are using is valid in an expression in
3643 @value{GDBN}. This includes conditional expressions, function calls, casts
3644 and string constants. It unfortunately does not include symbols defined
3645 by preprocessor @code{#define} commands.
3646
3647 @ifclear CONLY
3648 Because C is so widespread, most of the expressions shown in examples in
3649 this manual are in C. @xref{Languages, , Using @value{GDBN} with Different
3650 Languages}, for information on how to use expressions in other
3651 languages.
3652
3653 In this section, we discuss operators that you can use in @value{GDBN}
3654 expressions regardless of your programming language.
3655
3656 Casts are supported in all languages, not just in C, because it is so
3657 useful to cast a number into a pointer so as to examine a structure
3658 at that address in memory.
3659 @c FIXME: casts supported---Mod2 true?
3660 @end ifclear
3661
3662 @value{GDBN} supports these operators in addition to those of programming
3663 languages:
3664
3665 @table @code
3666 @item @@
3667 @samp{@@} is a binary operator for treating parts of memory as arrays.
3668 @xref{Arrays, ,Artificial arrays}, for more information.
3669
3670 @item ::
3671 @samp{::} allows you to specify a variable in terms of the file or
3672 function where it is defined. @xref{Variables, ,Program variables}.
3673
3674 @item @{@var{type}@} @var{addr}
3675 @cindex @{@var{type}@}
3676 @cindex type casting memory
3677 @cindex memory, viewing as typed object
3678 @cindex casts, to view memory
3679 Refers to an object of type @var{type} stored at address @var{addr} in
3680 memory. @var{addr} may be any expression whose value is an integer or
3681 pointer (but parentheses are required around binary operators, just as in
3682 a cast). This construct is allowed regardless of what kind of data is
3683 normally supposed to reside at @var{addr}.
3684 @end table
3685
3686 @node Variables
3687 @section Program variables
3688
3689 The most common kind of expression to use is the name of a variable
3690 in your program.
3691
3692 Variables in expressions are understood in the selected stack frame
3693 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}); they must either be global
3694 (or static) or be visible according to the scope rules of the
3695 programming language from the point of execution in that frame. This
3696 means that in the function
3697
3698 @example
3699 foo (a)
3700 int a;
3701 @{
3702 bar (a);
3703 @{
3704 int b = test ();
3705 bar (b);
3706 @}
3707 @}
3708 @end example
3709
3710 @noindent
3711 you can examine and use the variable @code{a} whenever your program is
3712 executing within the function @code{foo}, but you can only use or
3713 examine the variable @code{b} while your program is executing inside
3714 the block where @code{b} is declared.
3715
3716 @cindex variable name conflict
3717 There is an exception: you can refer to a variable or function whose
3718 scope is a single source file even if the current execution point is not
3719 in this file. But it is possible to have more than one such variable or
3720 function with the same name (in different source files). If that
3721 happens, referring to that name has unpredictable effects. If you wish,
3722 you can specify a static variable in a particular function or file,
3723 using the colon-colon notation:
3724
3725 @cindex colon-colon
3726 @iftex
3727 @c info cannot cope with a :: index entry, but why deprive hard copy readers?
3728 @kindex ::
3729 @end iftex
3730 @example
3731 @var{file}::@var{variable}
3732 @var{function}::@var{variable}
3733 @end example
3734
3735 @noindent
3736 Here @var{file} or @var{function} is the name of the context for the
3737 static @var{variable}. In the case of file names, you can use quotes to
3738 make sure @value{GDBN} parses the file name as a single word---for example,
3739 to print a global value of @code{x} defined in @file{f2.c}:
3740
3741 @example
3742 (@value{GDBP}) p 'f2.c'::x
3743 @end example
3744
3745 @ifclear CONLY
3746 @cindex C++ scope resolution
3747 This use of @samp{::} is very rarely in conflict with the very similar
3748 use of the same notation in C++. @value{GDBN} also supports use of the C++
3749 scope resolution operator in @value{GDBN} expressions.
3750 @c FIXME: Um, so what happens in one of those rare cases where it's in
3751 @c conflict?? --mew
3752 @end ifclear
3753
3754 @cindex wrong values
3755 @cindex variable values, wrong
3756 @quotation
3757 @emph{Warning:} Occasionally, a local variable may appear to have the
3758 wrong value at certain points in a function---just after entry to a new
3759 scope, and just before exit.
3760 @end quotation
3761 You may see this problem when you are stepping by machine instructions.
3762 This is because on most machines, it takes more than one instruction to
3763 set up a stack frame (including local variable definitions); if you are
3764 stepping by machine instructions, variables may appear to have the wrong
3765 values until the stack frame is completely built. On exit, it usually
3766 also takes more than one machine instruction to destroy a stack frame;
3767 after you begin stepping through that group of instructions, local
3768 variable definitions may be gone.
3769
3770 @node Arrays
3771 @section Artificial arrays
3772
3773 @cindex artificial array
3774 @kindex @@
3775 It is often useful to print out several successive objects of the
3776 same type in memory; a section of an array, or an array of
3777 dynamically determined size for which only a pointer exists in the
3778 program.
3779
3780 You can do this by referring to a contiguous span of memory as an
3781 @dfn{artificial array}, using the binary operator @samp{@@}. The left
3782 operand of @samp{@@} should be the first element of the desired array,
3783 as an individual object. The right operand should be the desired length
3784 of the array. The result is an array value whose elements are all of
3785 the type of the left argument. The first element is actually the left
3786 argument; the second element comes from bytes of memory immediately
3787 following those that hold the first element, and so on. Here is an
3788 example. If a program says
3789
3790 @example
3791 int *array = (int *) malloc (len * sizeof (int));
3792 @end example
3793
3794 @noindent
3795 you can print the contents of @code{array} with
3796
3797 @example
3798 p *array@@len
3799 @end example
3800
3801 The left operand of @samp{@@} must reside in memory. Array values made
3802 with @samp{@@} in this way behave just like other arrays in terms of
3803 subscripting, and are coerced to pointers when used in expressions.
3804 Artificial arrays most often appear in expressions via the value history
3805 (@pxref{Value History, ,Value history}), after printing one out.)
3806
3807 Sometimes the artificial array mechanism is not quite enough; in
3808 moderately complex data structures, the elements of interest may not
3809 actually be adjacent---for example, if you are interested in the values
3810 of pointers in an array. One useful work-around in this situation is
3811 to use a convenience variable (@pxref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
3812 variables}) as a counter in an expression that prints the first
3813 interesting value, and then repeat that expression via @key{RET}. For
3814 instance, suppose you have an array @code{dtab} of pointers to
3815 structures, and you are interested in the values of a field @code{fv}
3816 in each structure. Here is an example of what you might type:
3817
3818 @example
3819 set $i = 0
3820 p dtab[$i++]->fv
3821 @key{RET}
3822 @key{RET}
3823 @dots{}
3824 @end example
3825
3826 @node Output Formats
3827 @section Output formats
3828
3829 @cindex formatted output
3830 @cindex output formats
3831 By default, @value{GDBN} prints a value according to its data type. Sometimes
3832 this is not what you want. For example, you might want to print a number
3833 in hex, or a pointer in decimal. Or you might want to view data in memory
3834 at a certain address as a character string or as an instruction. To do
3835 these things, specify an @dfn{output format} when you print a value.
3836
3837 The simplest use of output formats is to say how to print a value
3838 already computed. This is done by starting the arguments of the
3839 @code{print} command with a slash and a format letter. The format
3840 letters supported are:
3841
3842 @table @code
3843 @item x
3844 Regard the bits of the value as an integer, and print the integer in
3845 hexadecimal.
3846
3847 @item d
3848 Print as integer in signed decimal.
3849
3850 @item u
3851 Print as integer in unsigned decimal.
3852
3853 @item o
3854 Print as integer in octal.
3855
3856 @item t
3857 Print as integer in binary. The letter @samp{t} stands for ``two''.
3858 @footnote{@samp{b} cannot be used because these format letters are also
3859 used with the @code{x} command, where @samp{b} stands for ``byte'';
3860 @pxref{Memory,,Examining memory}.}
3861
3862 @item a
3863 Print as an address, both absolute in hex and as an offset from the
3864 nearest preceding symbol. This format can be used to discover where (in
3865 what function) an unknown address is located:
3866
3867 @example
3868 (@value{GDBP}) p/a 0x54320
3869 $3 = 0x54320 <_initialize_vx+396>
3870 @end example
3871
3872 @item c
3873 Regard as an integer and print it as a character constant.
3874
3875 @item f
3876 Regard the bits of the value as a floating point number and print
3877 using typical floating point syntax.
3878 @end table
3879
3880 For example, to print the program counter in hex (@pxref{Registers}), type
3881
3882 @example
3883 p/x $pc
3884 @end example
3885
3886 @noindent
3887 Note that no space is required before the slash; this is because command
3888 names in @value{GDBN} cannot contain a slash.
3889
3890 To reprint the last value in the value history with a different format,
3891 you can use the @code{print} command with just a format and no
3892 expression. For example, @samp{p/x} reprints the last value in hex.
3893
3894 @node Memory
3895 @section Examining memory
3896
3897 You can use the command @code{x} (for ``examine'') to examine memory in
3898 any of several formats, independently of your program's data types.
3899
3900 @cindex examining memory
3901 @table @code
3902 @kindex x
3903 @item x/@var{nfu} @var{addr}
3904 @itemx x @var{addr}
3905 @itemx x
3906 Use the @code{x} command to examine memory.
3907 @end table
3908
3909 @var{n}, @var{f}, and @var{u} are all optional parameters that specify how
3910 much memory to display and how to format it; @var{addr} is an
3911 expression giving the address where you want to start displaying memory.
3912 If you use defaults for @var{nfu}, you need not type the slash @samp{/}.
3913 Several commands set convenient defaults for @var{addr}.
3914
3915 @table @r
3916 @item @var{n}, the repeat count
3917 The repeat count is a decimal integer; the default is 1. It specifies
3918 how much memory (counting by units @var{u}) to display.
3919 @c This really is **decimal**; unaffected by 'set radix' as of GDB
3920 @c 4.1.2.
3921
3922 @item @var{f}, the display format
3923 The display format is one of the formats used by @code{print},
3924 or @samp{s} (null-terminated string) or @samp{i} (machine instruction).
3925 The default is @samp{x} (hexadecimal) initially, or the format from the
3926 last time you used either @code{x} or @code{print}.
3927
3928 @item @var{u}, the unit size
3929 The unit size is any of
3930
3931 @table @code
3932 @item b
3933 Bytes.
3934 @item h
3935 Halfwords (two bytes).
3936 @item w
3937 Words (four bytes). This is the initial default.
3938 @item g
3939 Giant words (eight bytes).
3940 @end table
3941
3942 Each time you specify a unit size with @code{x}, that size becomes the
3943 default unit the next time you use @code{x}. (For the @samp{s} and
3944 @samp{i} formats, the unit size is ignored and is normally not written.)
3945
3946 @item @var{addr}, starting display address
3947 @var{addr} is the address where you want @value{GDBN} to begin displaying
3948 memory. The expression need not have a pointer value (though it may);
3949 it is always interpreted as an integer address of a byte of memory.
3950 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}, for more information on expressions. The default for
3951 @var{addr} is usually just after the last address examined---but several
3952 other commands also set the default address: @code{info breakpoints} (to
3953 the address of the last breakpoint listed), @code{info line} (to the
3954 starting address of a line), and @code{print} (if you use it to display
3955 a value from memory).
3956 @end table
3957
3958 For example, @samp{x/3uh 0x54320} is a request to display three halfwords
3959 (@code{h}) of memory, formatted as unsigned decimal integers (@samp{u}),
3960 starting at address @code{0x54320}. @samp{x/4xw $sp} prints the four
3961 words (@samp{w}) of memory above the stack pointer (here, @samp{$sp};
3962 @pxref{Registers}) in hexadecimal (@samp{x}).
3963
3964 Since the letters indicating unit sizes are all distinct from the
3965 letters specifying output formats, you do not have to remember whether
3966 unit size or format comes first; either order will work. The output
3967 specifications @samp{4xw} and @samp{4wx} mean exactly the same thing.
3968 (However, the count @var{n} must come first; @samp{wx4} will not work.)
3969
3970 Even though the unit size @var{u} is ignored for the formats @samp{s}
3971 and @samp{i}, you might still want to use a count @var{n}; for example,
3972 @samp{3i} specifies that you want to see three machine instructions,
3973 including any operands. The command @code{disassemble} gives an
3974 alternative way of inspecting machine instructions; @pxref{Machine
3975 Code,,Source and machine code}.
3976
3977 All the defaults for the arguments to @code{x} are designed to make it
3978 easy to continue scanning memory with minimal specifications each time
3979 you use @code{x}. For example, after you have inspected three machine
3980 instructions with @samp{x/3i @var{addr}}, you can inspect the next seven
3981 with just @samp{x/7}. If you use @key{RET} to repeat the @code{x} command,
3982 the repeat count @var{n} is used again; the other arguments default as
3983 for successive uses of @code{x}.
3984
3985 @cindex @code{$_}, @code{$__}, and value history
3986 The addresses and contents printed by the @code{x} command are not saved
3987 in the value history because there is often too much of them and they
3988 would get in the way. Instead, @value{GDBN} makes these values available for
3989 subsequent use in expressions as values of the convenience variables
3990 @code{$_} and @code{$__}. After an @code{x} command, the last address
3991 examined is available for use in expressions in the convenience variable
3992 @code{$_}. The contents of that address, as examined, are available in
3993 the convenience variable @code{$__}.
3994
3995 If the @code{x} command has a repeat count, the address and contents saved
3996 are from the last memory unit printed; this is not the same as the last
3997 address printed if several units were printed on the last line of output.
3998
3999 @node Auto Display
4000 @section Automatic display
4001 @cindex automatic display
4002 @cindex display of expressions
4003
4004 If you find that you want to print the value of an expression frequently
4005 (to see how it changes), you might want to add it to the @dfn{automatic
4006 display list} so that @value{GDBN} will print its value each time your program stops.
4007 Each expression added to the list is given a number to identify it;
4008 to remove an expression from the list, you specify that number.
4009 The automatic display looks like this:
4010
4011 @example
4012 2: foo = 38
4013 3: bar[5] = (struct hack *) 0x3804
4014 @end example
4015
4016 @noindent
4017 This display shows item numbers, expressions and their current values. As with
4018 displays you request manually using @code{x} or @code{print}, you can
4019 specify the output format you prefer; in fact, @code{display} decides
4020 whether to use @code{print} or @code{x} depending on how elaborate your
4021 format specification is---it uses @code{x} if you specify a unit size,
4022 or one of the two formats (@samp{i} and @samp{s}) that are only
4023 supported by @code{x}; otherwise it uses @code{print}.
4024
4025 @table @code
4026 @item display @var{exp}
4027 @kindex display
4028 Add the expression @var{exp} to the list of expressions to display
4029 each time your program stops. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
4030
4031 @code{display} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after using it.
4032
4033 @item display/@var{fmt} @var{exp}
4034 For @var{fmt} specifying only a display format and not a size or
4035 count, add the expression @var{exp} to the auto-display list but
4036 arranges to display it each time in the specified format @var{fmt}.
4037 @xref{Output Formats,,Output formats}.
4038
4039 @item display/@var{fmt} @var{addr}
4040 For @var{fmt} @samp{i} or @samp{s}, or including a unit-size or a
4041 number of units, add the expression @var{addr} as a memory address to
4042 be examined each time your program stops. Examining means in effect
4043 doing @samp{x/@var{fmt} @var{addr}}. @xref{Memory, ,Examining memory}.
4044 @end table
4045
4046 For example, @samp{display/i $pc} can be helpful, to see the machine
4047 instruction about to be executed each time execution stops (@samp{$pc}
4048 is a common name for the program counter; @pxref{Registers}).
4049
4050 @table @code
4051 @item undisplay @var{dnums}@dots{}
4052 @itemx delete display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4053 @kindex delete display
4054 @kindex undisplay
4055 Remove item numbers @var{dnums} from the list of expressions to display.
4056
4057 @code{undisplay} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} after using it.
4058 (Otherwise you would just get the error @samp{No display number @dots{}}.)
4059
4060 @item disable display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4061 @kindex disable display
4062 Disable the display of item numbers @var{dnums}. A disabled display
4063 item is not printed automatically, but is not forgotten. It may be
4064 enabled again later.
4065
4066 @item enable display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4067 @kindex enable display
4068 Enable display of item numbers @var{dnums}. It becomes effective once
4069 again in auto display of its expression, until you specify otherwise.
4070
4071 @item display
4072 Display the current values of the expressions on the list, just as is
4073 done when your program stops.
4074
4075 @item info display
4076 @kindex info display
4077 Print the list of expressions previously set up to display
4078 automatically, each one with its item number, but without showing the
4079 values. This includes disabled expressions, which are marked as such.
4080 It also includes expressions which would not be displayed right now
4081 because they refer to automatic variables not currently available.
4082 @end table
4083
4084 If a display expression refers to local variables, then it does not make
4085 sense outside the lexical context for which it was set up. Such an
4086 expression is disabled when execution enters a context where one of its
4087 variables is not defined. For example, if you give the command
4088 @code{display last_char} while inside a function with an argument
4089 @code{last_char}, then this argument will be displayed while your program
4090 continues to stop inside that function. When it stops elsewhere---where
4091 there is no variable @code{last_char}---display is disabled. The next time
4092 your program stops where @code{last_char} is meaningful, you can enable the
4093 display expression once again.
4094
4095 @node Print Settings
4096 @section Print settings
4097
4098 @cindex format options
4099 @cindex print settings
4100 @value{GDBN} provides the following ways to control how arrays, structures,
4101 and symbols are printed.
4102
4103 @noindent
4104 These settings are useful for debugging programs in any language:
4105
4106 @table @code
4107 @item set print address
4108 @item set print address on
4109 @kindex set print address
4110 @value{GDBN} will print memory addresses showing the location of stack
4111 traces, structure values, pointer values, breakpoints, and so forth,
4112 even when it also displays the contents of those addresses. The default
4113 is on. For example, this is what a stack frame display looks like, with
4114 @code{set print address on}:
4115
4116 @smallexample
4117 @group
4118 (@value{GDBP}) f
4119 #0 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<<", rq=0x34c88 ">>")
4120 at input.c:530
4121 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
4122 @end group
4123 @end smallexample
4124
4125 @item set print address off
4126 Do not print addresses when displaying their contents. For example,
4127 this is the same stack frame displayed with @code{set print address off}:
4128
4129 @smallexample
4130 @group
4131 (@value{GDBP}) set print addr off
4132 (@value{GDBP}) f
4133 #0 set_quotes (lq="<<", rq=">>") at input.c:530
4134 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
4135 @end group
4136 @end smallexample
4137
4138 You can use @samp{set print address off} to eliminate all machine
4139 dependent displays from the @value{GDBN} interface. For example, with
4140 @code{print address off}, you should get the same text for backtraces on
4141 all machines---whether or not they involve pointer arguments.
4142
4143 @item show print address
4144 @kindex show print address
4145 Show whether or not addresses are to be printed.
4146 @end table
4147
4148 When @value{GDBN} prints a symbolic address, it normally prints the
4149 closest earlier symbol plus an offset. If that symbol does not uniquely
4150 identify the address (for example, it is a name whose scope is a single
4151 source file), you may need to disambiguate. One way to do this is with
4152 @code{info line}, for example @code{info line *0x4537}. Alternately,
4153 you can set @value{GDBN} to print the source file and line number when
4154 it prints a symbolic address:
4155
4156 @table @code
4157 @item set print symbol-filename on
4158 @kindex set print symbol-filename
4159 Tell @value{GDBN} to print the source file name and line number of a
4160 symbol in the symbolic form of an address.
4161
4162 @item set print symbol-filename off
4163 Do not print source file name and line number of a symbol. This is the
4164 default.
4165
4166 @item show print symbol-filename
4167 @kindex show print symbol-filename
4168 Show whether or not @value{GDBN} will print the source file name and
4169 line number of a symbol in the symbolic form of an address.
4170 @end table
4171
4172 Also, you may wish to see the symbolic form only if the address being
4173 printed is reasonably close to the closest earlier symbol:
4174
4175 @table @code
4176 @item set print max-symbolic-offset @var{max-offset}
4177 @kindex set print max-symbolic-offset
4178 Tell @value{GDBN} to only display the symbolic form of an address if the
4179 offset between the closest earlier symbol and the address is less than
4180 @var{max-offset}. The default is 0, which means to always print the
4181 symbolic form of an address, if any symbol precedes it.
4182
4183 @item show print max-symbolic-offset
4184 @kindex show print max-symbolic-offset
4185 Ask how large the maximum offset is that @value{GDBN} will print in a
4186 symbolic address.
4187 @end table
4188
4189 @table @code
4190 @item set print array
4191 @itemx set print array on
4192 @kindex set print array
4193 @value{GDBN} will pretty-print arrays. This format is more convenient to read,
4194 but uses more space. The default is off.
4195
4196 @item set print array off
4197 Return to compressed format for arrays.
4198
4199 @item show print array
4200 @kindex show print array
4201 Show whether compressed or pretty format is selected for displaying
4202 arrays.
4203
4204 @item set print elements @var{number-of-elements}
4205 @kindex set print elements
4206 If @value{GDBN} is printing a large array, it will stop printing after it has
4207 printed the number of elements set by the @code{set print elements} command.
4208 This limit also applies to the display of strings.
4209 Setting the number of elements to zero means that the printing is unlimited.
4210
4211 @item show print elements
4212 @kindex show print elements
4213 Display the number of elements of a large array that @value{GDBN} will print
4214 before losing patience.
4215
4216 @item set print pretty on
4217 @kindex set print pretty
4218 Cause @value{GDBN} to print structures in an indented format with one member per
4219 line, like this:
4220
4221 @smallexample
4222 @group
4223 $1 = @{
4224 next = 0x0,
4225 flags = @{
4226 sweet = 1,
4227 sour = 1
4228 @},
4229 meat = 0x54 "Pork"
4230 @}
4231 @end group
4232 @end smallexample
4233
4234 @item set print pretty off
4235 Cause @value{GDBN} to print structures in a compact format, like this:
4236
4237 @smallexample
4238 @group
4239 $1 = @{next = 0x0, flags = @{sweet = 1, sour = 1@}, \
4240 meat = 0x54 "Pork"@}
4241 @end group
4242 @end smallexample
4243
4244 @noindent
4245 This is the default format.
4246
4247 @item show print pretty
4248 @kindex show print pretty
4249 Show which format @value{GDBN} will use to print structures.
4250
4251 @item set print sevenbit-strings on
4252 @kindex set print sevenbit-strings
4253 Print using only seven-bit characters; if this option is set,
4254 @value{GDBN} will display any eight-bit characters (in strings or character
4255 values) using the notation @code{\}@var{nnn}. For example, @kbd{M-a} is
4256 displayed as @code{\341}.
4257
4258 @item set print sevenbit-strings off
4259 Print using either seven-bit or eight-bit characters, as required. This
4260 is the default.
4261
4262 @item show print sevenbit-strings
4263 @kindex show print sevenbit-strings
4264 Show whether or not @value{GDBN} will print only seven-bit characters.
4265
4266 @item set print union on
4267 @kindex set print union
4268 Tell @value{GDBN} to print unions which are contained in structures. This is the
4269 default setting.
4270
4271 @item set print union off
4272 Tell @value{GDBN} not to print unions which are contained in structures.
4273
4274 @item show print union
4275 @kindex show print union
4276 Ask @value{GDBN} whether or not it will print unions which are contained in
4277 structures.
4278
4279 For example, given the declarations
4280
4281 @smallexample
4282 typedef enum @{Tree, Bug@} Species;
4283 typedef enum @{Big_tree, Acorn, Seedling@} Tree_forms;
4284 typedef enum @{Caterpillar, Cocoon, Butterfly@}
4285 Bug_forms;
4286
4287 struct thing @{
4288 Species it;
4289 union @{
4290 Tree_forms tree;
4291 Bug_forms bug;
4292 @} form;
4293 @};
4294
4295 struct thing foo = @{Tree, @{Acorn@}@};
4296 @end smallexample
4297
4298 @noindent
4299 with @code{set print union on} in effect @samp{p foo} would print
4300
4301 @smallexample
4302 $1 = @{it = Tree, form = @{tree = Acorn, bug = Cocoon@}@}
4303 @end smallexample
4304
4305 @noindent
4306 and with @code{set print union off} in effect it would print
4307
4308 @smallexample
4309 $1 = @{it = Tree, form = @{...@}@}
4310 @end smallexample
4311 @end table
4312
4313 @ifclear CONLY
4314 @need 1000
4315 @noindent
4316 These settings are of interest when debugging C++ programs:
4317
4318 @table @code
4319 @item set print demangle
4320 @itemx set print demangle on
4321 @kindex set print demangle
4322 Print C++ names in their source form rather than in the encoded
4323 (``mangled'') form passed to the assembler and linker for type-safe
4324 linkage. The default is @samp{on}.
4325
4326 @item show print demangle
4327 @kindex show print demangle
4328 Show whether C++ names will be printed in mangled or demangled form.
4329
4330 @item set print asm-demangle
4331 @itemx set print asm-demangle on
4332 @kindex set print asm-demangle
4333 Print C++ names in their source form rather than their mangled form, even
4334 in assembler code printouts such as instruction disassemblies.
4335 The default is off.
4336
4337 @item show print asm-demangle
4338 @kindex show print asm-demangle
4339 Show whether C++ names in assembly listings will be printed in mangled
4340 or demangled form.
4341
4342 @item set demangle-style @var{style}
4343 @kindex set demangle-style
4344 @cindex C++ symbol decoding style
4345 @cindex symbol decoding style, C++
4346 Choose among several encoding schemes used by different compilers to
4347 represent C++ names. The choices for @var{style} are currently:
4348
4349 @table @code
4350 @item auto
4351 Allow @value{GDBN} to choose a decoding style by inspecting your program.
4352
4353 @item gnu
4354 Decode based on the GNU C++ compiler (@code{g++}) encoding algorithm.
4355
4356 @item lucid
4357 Decode based on the Lucid C++ compiler (@code{lcc}) encoding algorithm.
4358
4359 @item arm
4360 Decode using the algorithm in the @cite{C++ Annotated Reference Manual}.
4361 @strong{Warning:} this setting alone is not sufficient to allow
4362 debugging @code{cfront}-generated executables. @value{GDBN} would
4363 require further enhancement to permit that.
4364 @end table
4365
4366 @item show demangle-style
4367 @kindex show demangle-style
4368 Display the encoding style currently in use for decoding C++ symbols.
4369
4370 @item set print object
4371 @itemx set print object on
4372 @kindex set print object
4373 When displaying a pointer to an object, identify the @emph{actual}
4374 (derived) type of the object rather than the @emph{declared} type, using
4375 the virtual function table.
4376
4377 @item set print object off
4378 Display only the declared type of objects, without reference to the
4379 virtual function table. This is the default setting.
4380
4381 @item show print object
4382 @kindex show print object
4383 Show whether actual, or declared, object types will be displayed.
4384
4385 @item set print vtbl
4386 @itemx set print vtbl on
4387 @kindex set print vtbl
4388 Pretty print C++ virtual function tables. The default is off.
4389
4390 @item set print vtbl off
4391 Do not pretty print C++ virtual function tables.
4392
4393 @item show print vtbl
4394 @kindex show print vtbl
4395 Show whether C++ virtual function tables are pretty printed, or not.
4396 @end table
4397 @end ifclear
4398
4399 @node Value History
4400 @section Value history
4401
4402 @cindex value history
4403 Values printed by the @code{print} command are saved in the @value{GDBN} @dfn{value
4404 history} so that you can refer to them in other expressions. Values are
4405 kept until the symbol table is re-read or discarded (for example with
4406 the @code{file} or @code{symbol-file} commands). When the symbol table
4407 changes, the value history is discarded, since the values may contain
4408 pointers back to the types defined in the symbol table.
4409
4410 @cindex @code{$}
4411 @cindex @code{$$}
4412 @cindex history number
4413 The values printed are given @dfn{history numbers} for you to refer to them
4414 by. These are successive integers starting with one. @code{print} shows you
4415 the history number assigned to a value by printing @samp{$@var{num} = }
4416 before the value; here @var{num} is the history number.
4417
4418 To refer to any previous value, use @samp{$} followed by the value's
4419 history number. The way @code{print} labels its output is designed to
4420 remind you of this. Just @code{$} refers to the most recent value in
4421 the history, and @code{$$} refers to the value before that.
4422 @code{$$@var{n}} refers to the @var{n}th value from the end; @code{$$2}
4423 is the value just prior to @code{$$}, @code{$$1} is equivalent to
4424 @code{$$}, and @code{$$0} is equivalent to @code{$}.
4425
4426 For example, suppose you have just printed a pointer to a structure and
4427 want to see the contents of the structure. It suffices to type
4428
4429 @example
4430 p *$
4431 @end example
4432
4433 If you have a chain of structures where the component @code{next} points
4434 to the next one, you can print the contents of the next one with this:
4435
4436 @example
4437 p *$.next
4438 @end example
4439
4440 @noindent
4441 You can print successive links in the chain by repeating this
4442 command---which you can do by just typing @key{RET}.
4443
4444 Note that the history records values, not expressions. If the value of
4445 @code{x} is 4 and you type these commands:
4446
4447 @example
4448 print x
4449 set x=5
4450 @end example
4451
4452 @noindent
4453 then the value recorded in the value history by the @code{print} command
4454 remains 4 even though the value of @code{x} has changed.
4455
4456 @table @code
4457 @kindex show values
4458 @item show values
4459 Print the last ten values in the value history, with their item numbers.
4460 This is like @samp{p@ $$9} repeated ten times, except that @code{show
4461 values} does not change the history.
4462
4463 @item show values @var{n}
4464 Print ten history values centered on history item number @var{n}.
4465
4466 @item show values +
4467 Print ten history values just after the values last printed. If no more
4468 values are available, produces no display.
4469 @end table
4470
4471 Pressing @key{RET} to repeat @code{show values @var{n}} has exactly the
4472 same effect as @samp{show values +}.
4473
4474 @node Convenience Vars
4475 @section Convenience variables
4476
4477 @cindex convenience variables
4478 @value{GDBN} provides @dfn{convenience variables} that you can use within
4479 @value{GDBN} to hold on to a value and refer to it later. These variables
4480 exist entirely within @value{GDBN}; they are not part of your program, and
4481 setting a convenience variable has no direct effect on further execution
4482 of your program. That is why you can use them freely.
4483
4484 Convenience variables are prefixed with @samp{$}. Any name preceded by
4485 @samp{$} can be used for a convenience variable, unless it is one of
4486 the predefined machine-specific register names (@pxref{Registers}).
4487 (Value history references, in contrast, are @emph{numbers} preceded
4488 by @samp{$}. @xref{Value History, ,Value history}.)
4489
4490 You can save a value in a convenience variable with an assignment
4491 expression, just as you would set a variable in your program.
4492 For example:
4493
4494 @example
4495 set $foo = *object_ptr
4496 @end example
4497
4498 @noindent
4499 would save in @code{$foo} the value contained in the object pointed to by
4500 @code{object_ptr}.
4501
4502 Using a convenience variable for the first time creates it; but its value
4503 is @code{void} until you assign a new value. You can alter the value with
4504 another assignment at any time.
4505
4506 Convenience variables have no fixed types. You can assign a convenience
4507 variable any type of value, including structures and arrays, even if
4508 that variable already has a value of a different type. The convenience
4509 variable, when used as an expression, has the type of its current value.
4510
4511 @table @code
4512 @item show convenience
4513 @kindex show convenience
4514 Print a list of convenience variables used so far, and their values.
4515 Abbreviated @code{show con}.
4516 @end table
4517
4518 One of the ways to use a convenience variable is as a counter to be
4519 incremented or a pointer to be advanced. For example, to print
4520 a field from successive elements of an array of structures:
4521
4522 @example
4523 set $i = 0
4524 print bar[$i++]->contents
4525 @i{@dots{} repeat that command by typing @key{RET}.}
4526 @end example
4527
4528 Some convenience variables are created automatically by @value{GDBN} and given
4529 values likely to be useful.
4530
4531 @table @code
4532 @item $_
4533 @kindex $_
4534 The variable @code{$_} is automatically set by the @code{x} command to
4535 the last address examined (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining memory}). Other
4536 commands which provide a default address for @code{x} to examine also
4537 set @code{$_} to that address; these commands include @code{info line}
4538 and @code{info breakpoint}. The type of @code{$_} is @code{void *}
4539 except when set by the @code{x} command, in which case it is a pointer
4540 to the type of @code{$__}.
4541
4542 @item $__
4543 @kindex $__
4544 The variable @code{$__} is automatically set by the @code{x} command
4545 to the value found in the last address examined. Its type is chosen
4546 to match the format in which the data was printed.
4547 @end table
4548
4549 @node Registers
4550 @section Registers
4551
4552 @cindex registers
4553 You can refer to machine register contents, in expressions, as variables
4554 with names starting with @samp{$}. The names of registers are different
4555 for each machine; use @code{info registers} to see the names used on
4556 your machine.
4557
4558 @table @code
4559 @item info registers
4560 @kindex info registers
4561 Print the names and values of all registers except floating-point
4562 registers (in the selected stack frame).
4563
4564 @item info all-registers
4565 @kindex info all-registers
4566 @cindex floating point registers
4567 Print the names and values of all registers, including floating-point
4568 registers.
4569
4570 @item info registers @var{regname} @dots{}
4571 Print the relativized value of each specified register @var{regname}.
4572 @var{regname} may be any register name valid on the machine you are using, with
4573 or without the initial @samp{$}.
4574 @end table
4575
4576 @value{GDBN} has four ``standard'' register names that are available (in
4577 expressions) on most machines---whenever they do not conflict with an
4578 architecture's canonical mnemonics for registers. The register names
4579 @code{$pc} and @code{$sp} are used for the program counter register and
4580 the stack pointer. @code{$fp} is used for a register that contains a
4581 pointer to the current stack frame, and @code{$ps} is used for a
4582 register that contains the processor status. For example,
4583 you could print the program counter in hex with
4584
4585 @example
4586 p/x $pc
4587 @end example
4588
4589 @noindent
4590 or print the instruction to be executed next with
4591
4592 @example
4593 x/i $pc
4594 @end example
4595
4596 @noindent
4597 or add four to the stack pointer@footnote{This is a way of removing
4598 one word from the stack, on machines where stacks grow downward in
4599 memory (most machines, nowadays). This assumes that the innermost
4600 stack frame is selected; setting @code{$sp} is not allowed when other
4601 stack frames are selected. To pop entire frames off the stack,
4602 regardless of machine architecture, use @code{return};
4603 @pxref{Returning, ,Returning from a function}.} with
4604
4605 @example
4606 set $sp += 4
4607 @end example
4608
4609 Whenever possible, these four standard register names are available on
4610 your machine even though the machine has different canonical mnemonics,
4611 so long as there is no conflict. The @code{info registers} command
4612 shows the canonical names. For example, on the SPARC, @code{info
4613 registers} displays the processor status register as @code{$psr} but you
4614 can also refer to it as @code{$ps}.
4615
4616 @value{GDBN} always considers the contents of an ordinary register as an
4617 integer when the register is examined in this way. Some machines have
4618 special registers which can hold nothing but floating point; these
4619 registers are considered to have floating point values. There is no way
4620 to refer to the contents of an ordinary register as floating point value
4621 (although you can @emph{print} it as a floating point value with
4622 @samp{print/f $@var{regname}}).
4623
4624 Some registers have distinct ``raw'' and ``virtual'' data formats. This
4625 means that the data format in which the register contents are saved by
4626 the operating system is not the same one that your program normally
4627 sees. For example, the registers of the 68881 floating point
4628 coprocessor are always saved in ``extended'' (raw) format, but all C
4629 programs expect to work with ``double'' (virtual) format. In such
4630 cases, @value{GDBN} normally works with the virtual format only (the format that
4631 makes sense for your program), but the @code{info registers} command
4632 prints the data in both formats.
4633
4634 Normally, register values are relative to the selected stack frame
4635 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}). This means that you get the
4636 value that the register would contain if all stack frames farther in
4637 were exited and their saved registers restored. In order to see the
4638 true contents of hardware registers, you must select the innermost
4639 frame (with @samp{frame 0}).
4640
4641 However, @value{GDBN} must deduce where registers are saved, from the machine
4642 code generated by your compiler. If some registers are not saved, or if
4643 @value{GDBN} is unable to locate the saved registers, the selected stack
4644 frame will make no difference.
4645
4646 @ifset AMD29K
4647 @table @code
4648 @item set rstack_high_address @var{address}
4649 @kindex set rstack_high_address
4650 @cindex AMD 29K register stack
4651 @cindex register stack, AMD29K
4652 On AMD 29000 family processors, registers are saved in a separate
4653 ``register stack''. There is no way for @value{GDBN} to determine the extent
4654 of this stack. Normally, @value{GDBN} just assumes that the stack is ``large
4655 enough''. This may result in @value{GDBN} referencing memory locations that
4656 do not exist. If necessary, you can get around this problem by
4657 specifying the ending address of the register stack with the @code{set
4658 rstack_high_address} command. The argument should be an address, which
4659 you will probably want to precede with @samp{0x} to specify in
4660 hexadecimal.
4661
4662 @item show rstack_high_address
4663 @kindex show rstack_high_address
4664 Display the current limit of the register stack, on AMD 29000 family
4665 processors.
4666 @end table
4667 @end ifset
4668
4669 @ifclear HAVE-FLOAT
4670 @node Floating Point Hardware
4671 @section Floating point hardware
4672 @cindex floating point
4673
4674 @c FIXME! Really host, not target?
4675 Depending on the host machine architecture, @value{GDBN} may be able to give
4676 you more information about the status of the floating point hardware.
4677
4678 @table @code
4679 @item info float
4680 @kindex info float
4681 Display hardware-dependent information about the floating
4682 point unit. The exact contents and layout vary depending on the
4683 floating point chip; on some platforms, @samp{info float} is not
4684 available at all.
4685 @end table
4686 @c FIXME: this is a cop-out. Try to get examples, explanations. Only
4687 @c FIXME...supported currently on arm's and 386's. Mark properly with
4688 @c FIXME... m4 macros to isolate general statements from hardware-dep,
4689 @c FIXME... at that point.
4690 @end ifclear
4691
4692 @ifclear CONLY
4693 @node Languages
4694 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} with Different Languages
4695 @cindex languages
4696
4697 @ifset MOD2
4698 Although programming languages generally have common aspects, they are
4699 rarely expressed in the same manner. For instance, in ANSI C,
4700 dereferencing a pointer @code{p} is accomplished by @code{*p}, but in
4701 Modula-2, it is accomplished by @code{p^}. Values can also be
4702 represented (and displayed) differently. Hex numbers in C are written
4703 like @samp{0x1ae}, while in Modula-2 they appear as @samp{1AEH}.
4704 @end ifset
4705
4706 @cindex working language
4707 Language-specific information is built into @value{GDBN} for some languages,
4708 allowing you to express operations like the above in your program's
4709 native language, and allowing @value{GDBN} to output values in a manner
4710 consistent with the syntax of your program's native language. The
4711 language you use to build expressions, called the @dfn{working
4712 language}, can be selected manually, or @value{GDBN} can set it
4713 automatically.
4714
4715 @menu
4716 * Setting:: Switching between source languages
4717 * Show:: Displaying the language
4718 @ifset MOD2
4719 * Checks:: Type and range checks
4720 @end ifset
4721
4722 * Support:: Supported languages
4723 @end menu
4724
4725 @node Setting
4726 @section Switching between source languages
4727
4728 There are two ways to control the working language---either have @value{GDBN}
4729 set it automatically, or select it manually yourself. You can use the
4730 @code{set language} command for either purpose. On startup, @value{GDBN}
4731 defaults to setting the language automatically.
4732
4733 @menu
4734 * Manually:: Setting the working language manually
4735 * Automatically:: Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language
4736 @end menu
4737
4738 @node Manually
4739 @subsection Setting the working language
4740
4741 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically,
4742 expressions are interpreted the same way in your debugging session and
4743 your program.
4744
4745 @kindex set language
4746 If you wish, you may set the language manually. To do this, issue the
4747 command @samp{set language @var{lang}}, where @var{lang} is the name of
4748 a language, such as
4749 @ifclear MOD2
4750 @code{c}.
4751 @end ifclear
4752 @ifset MOD2
4753 @code{c} or @code{modula-2}.
4754 @end ifset
4755 For a list of the supported languages, type @samp{set language}.
4756 @c FIXME: rms: eventually this command should be "help set language".
4757
4758 @ifset MOD2
4759 Setting the language manually prevents @value{GDBN} from updating the working
4760 language automatically. This can lead to confusion if you try
4761 to debug a program when the working language is not the same as the
4762 source language, when an expression is acceptable to both
4763 languages---but means different things. For instance, if the current
4764 source file were written in C, and @value{GDBN} was parsing Modula-2, a
4765 command such as:
4766
4767 @example
4768 print a = b + c
4769 @end example
4770
4771 @noindent
4772 might not have the effect you intended. In C, this means to add
4773 @code{b} and @code{c} and place the result in @code{a}. The result
4774 printed would be the value of @code{a}. In Modula-2, this means to compare
4775 @code{a} to the result of @code{b+c}, yielding a @code{BOOLEAN} value.
4776 @end ifset
4777
4778 @node Automatically
4779 @subsection Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language
4780
4781 To have @value{GDBN} set the working language automatically, use @samp{set
4782 language local} or @samp{set language auto}. @value{GDBN} then infers the
4783 language that a program was written in by looking at the name of its
4784 source files, and examining their extensions:
4785
4786 @table @file
4787 @ifset MOD2
4788 @item *.mod
4789 Modula-2 source file
4790 @end ifset
4791
4792 @item *.c
4793 C source file
4794
4795 @item *.C
4796 @itemx *.cc
4797 C++ source file
4798 @end table
4799
4800 This information is recorded for each function or procedure in a source
4801 file. When your program stops in a frame (usually by encountering a
4802 breakpoint), @value{GDBN} sets the working language to the language recorded
4803 for the function in that frame. If the language for a frame is unknown
4804 (that is, if the function or block corresponding to the frame was
4805 defined in a source file that does not have a recognized extension), the
4806 current working language is not changed, and @value{GDBN} issues a warning.
4807
4808 This may not seem necessary for most programs, which are written
4809 entirely in one source language. However, program modules and libraries
4810 written in one source language can be used by a main program written in
4811 a different source language. Using @samp{set language auto} in this
4812 case frees you from having to set the working language manually.
4813
4814 @node Show
4815 @section Displaying the language
4816
4817 The following commands will help you find out which language is the
4818 working language, and also what language source files were written in.
4819
4820 @kindex show language
4821 @kindex info frame
4822 @kindex info source
4823 @table @code
4824 @item show language
4825 Display the current working language. This is the
4826 language you can use with commands such as @code{print} to
4827 build and compute expressions that may involve variables in your program.
4828
4829 @item info frame
4830 Among the other information listed here (@pxref{Frame Info, ,Information
4831 about a frame}) is the source language for this frame. This is the
4832 language that will become the working language if you ever use an
4833 identifier that is in this frame.
4834
4835 @item info source
4836 Among the other information listed here (@pxref{Symbols, ,Examining the
4837 Symbol Table}) is the source language of this source file.
4838 @end table
4839
4840 @ifset MOD2
4841 @node Checks
4842 @section Type and range checking
4843
4844 @quotation
4845 @emph{Warning:} In this release, the @value{GDBN} commands for type and range
4846 checking are included, but they do not yet have any effect. This
4847 section documents the intended facilities.
4848 @end quotation
4849 @c FIXME remove warning when type/range code added
4850
4851 Some languages are designed to guard you against making seemingly common
4852 errors through a series of compile- and run-time checks. These include
4853 checking the type of arguments to functions and operators, and making
4854 sure mathematical overflows are caught at run time. Checks such as
4855 these help to ensure a program's correctness once it has been compiled
4856 by eliminating type mismatches, and providing active checks for range
4857 errors when your program is running.
4858
4859 @value{GDBN} can check for conditions like the above if you wish.
4860 Although @value{GDBN} will not check the statements in your program, it
4861 can check expressions entered directly into @value{GDBN} for evaluation via
4862 the @code{print} command, for example. As with the working language,
4863 @value{GDBN} can also decide whether or not to check automatically based on
4864 your program's source language. @xref{Support, ,Supported languages},
4865 for the default settings of supported languages.
4866
4867 @menu
4868 * Type Checking:: An overview of type checking
4869 * Range Checking:: An overview of range checking
4870 @end menu
4871
4872 @cindex type checking
4873 @cindex checks, type
4874 @node Type Checking
4875 @subsection An overview of type checking
4876
4877 Some languages, such as Modula-2, are strongly typed, meaning that the
4878 arguments to operators and functions have to be of the correct type,
4879 otherwise an error occurs. These checks prevent type mismatch
4880 errors from ever causing any run-time problems. For example,
4881
4882 @example
4883 1 + 2 @result{} 3
4884 @exdent but
4885 @error{} 1 + 2.3
4886 @end example
4887
4888 The second example fails because the @code{CARDINAL} 1 is not
4889 type-compatible with the @code{REAL} 2.3.
4890
4891 For expressions you use in @value{GDBN} commands, you can tell the @value{GDBN}
4892 type checker to skip checking; to treat any mismatches as errors and
4893 abandon the expression; or only issue warnings when type mismatches
4894 occur, but evaluate the expression anyway. When you choose the last of
4895 these, @value{GDBN} evaluates expressions like the second example above, but
4896 also issues a warning.
4897
4898 Even though you may turn type checking off, other type-based reasons may
4899 prevent @value{GDBN} from evaluating an expression. For instance, @value{GDBN} does not
4900 know how to add an @code{int} and a @code{struct foo}. These particular
4901 type errors have nothing to do with the language in use, and usually
4902 arise from expressions, such as the one described above, which make
4903 little sense to evaluate anyway.
4904
4905 Each language defines to what degree it is strict about type. For
4906 instance, both Modula-2 and C require the arguments to arithmetical
4907 operators to be numbers. In C, enumerated types and pointers can be
4908 represented as numbers, so that they are valid arguments to mathematical
4909 operators. @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for further
4910 details on specific languages.
4911
4912 @value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling the type checker:
4913
4914 @kindex set check
4915 @kindex set check type
4916 @kindex show check type
4917 @table @code
4918 @item set check type auto
4919 Set type checking on or off based on the current working language.
4920 @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for the default settings for
4921 each language.
4922
4923 @item set check type on
4924 @itemx set check type off
4925 Set type checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
4926 current working language. Issue a warning if the setting does not
4927 match the language default. If any type mismatches occur in
4928 evaluating an expression while typechecking is on, @value{GDBN} prints a
4929 message and aborts evaluation of the expression.
4930
4931 @item set check type warn
4932 Cause the type checker to issue warnings, but to always attempt to
4933 evaluate the expression. Evaluating the expression may still
4934 be impossible for other reasons. For example, @value{GDBN} cannot add
4935 numbers and structures.
4936
4937 @item show type
4938 Show the current setting of the type checker, and whether or not @value{GDBN} is
4939 setting it automatically.
4940 @end table
4941
4942 @cindex range checking
4943 @cindex checks, range
4944 @node Range Checking
4945 @subsection An overview of range checking
4946
4947 In some languages (such as Modula-2), it is an error to exceed the
4948 bounds of a type; this is enforced with run-time checks. Such range
4949 checking is meant to ensure program correctness by making sure
4950 computations do not overflow, or indices on an array element access do
4951 not exceed the bounds of the array.
4952
4953 For expressions you use in @value{GDBN} commands, you can tell
4954 @value{GDBN} to treat range errors in one of three ways: ignore them,
4955 always treat them as errors and abandon the expression, or issue
4956 warnings but evaluate the expression anyway.
4957
4958 A range error can result from numerical overflow, from exceeding an
4959 array index bound, or when you type a constant that is not a member
4960 of any type. Some languages, however, do not treat overflows as an
4961 error. In many implementations of C, mathematical overflow causes the
4962 result to ``wrap around'' to lower values---for example, if @var{m} is
4963 the largest integer value, and @var{s} is the smallest, then
4964
4965 @example
4966 @var{m} + 1 @result{} @var{s}
4967 @end example
4968
4969 This, too, is specific to individual languages, and in some cases
4970 specific to individual compilers or machines. @xref{Support, ,
4971 Supported languages}, for further details on specific languages.
4972
4973 @value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling the range checker:
4974
4975 @kindex set check
4976 @kindex set check range
4977 @kindex show check range
4978 @table @code
4979 @item set check range auto
4980 Set range checking on or off based on the current working language.
4981 @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for the default settings for
4982 each language.
4983
4984 @item set check range on
4985 @itemx set check range off
4986 Set range checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
4987 current working language. A warning is issued if the setting does not
4988 match the language default. If a range error occurs, then a message
4989 is printed and evaluation of the expression is aborted.
4990
4991 @item set check range warn
4992 Output messages when the @value{GDBN} range checker detects a range error,
4993 but attempt to evaluate the expression anyway. Evaluating the
4994 expression may still be impossible for other reasons, such as accessing
4995 memory that the process does not own (a typical example from many UNIX
4996 systems).
4997
4998 @item show range
4999 Show the current setting of the range checker, and whether or not it is
5000 being set automatically by @value{GDBN}.
5001 @end table
5002 @end ifset
5003
5004 @node Support
5005 @section Supported languages
5006
5007 @ifset MOD2
5008 @value{GDBN} 4 supports C, C++, and Modula-2.
5009 @end ifset
5010 @ifclear MOD2
5011 @value{GDBN} 4 supports C, and C++.
5012 @end ifclear
5013 Some @value{GDBN} features may be used in expressions regardless of the
5014 language you use: the @value{GDBN} @code{@@} and @code{::} operators,
5015 and the @samp{@{type@}addr} construct (@pxref{Expressions,
5016 ,Expressions}) can be used with the constructs of any supported
5017 language.
5018
5019 The following sections detail to what degree each source language is
5020 supported by @value{GDBN}. These sections are not meant to be language
5021 tutorials or references, but serve only as a reference guide to what the
5022 @value{GDBN} expression parser will accept, and what input and output
5023 formats should look like for different languages. There are many good
5024 books written on each of these languages; please look to these for a
5025 language reference or tutorial.
5026
5027 @ifset MOD2
5028 @menu
5029 * C:: C and C++
5030 * Modula-2:: Modula-2
5031 @end menu
5032
5033 @node C
5034 @subsection C and C++
5035 @cindex C and C++
5036 @cindex expressions in C or C++
5037
5038 Since C and C++ are so closely related, many features of @value{GDBN} apply
5039 to both languages. Whenever this is the case, we discuss both languages
5040 together.
5041 @end ifset
5042 @ifclear MOD2
5043 @c Cancel this below, under same condition, at end of this chapter!
5044 @up
5045 @end ifclear
5046
5047 @cindex C++
5048 @kindex g++
5049 @cindex GNU C++
5050 The C++ debugging facilities are jointly implemented by the GNU C++
5051 compiler and @value{GDBN}. Therefore, to debug your C++ code effectively,
5052 you must compile your C++ programs with the GNU C++ compiler,
5053 @code{g++}.
5054 @end ifclear
5055 @ifset CONLY
5056 @node C
5057 @chapter C Language Support
5058 @cindex C language
5059 @cindex expressions in C
5060
5061 Information specific to the C language is built into @value{GDBN} so that you
5062 can use C expressions while degugging. This also permits @value{GDBN} to
5063 output values in a manner consistent with C conventions.
5064
5065 @menu
5066 * C Operators:: C operators
5067 * C Constants:: C constants
5068 * Debugging C:: @value{GDBN} and C
5069 @end menu
5070 @end ifset
5071 @ifclear CONLY
5072 @menu
5073 * C Operators:: C and C++ operators
5074 * C Constants:: C and C++ constants
5075 * Cplus expressions:: C++ expressions
5076 * C Defaults:: Default settings for C and C++
5077 @ifset MOD2
5078 * C Checks:: C and C++ type and range checks
5079 @end ifset
5080
5081 * Debugging C:: @value{GDBN} and C
5082 * Debugging C plus plus:: Special features for C++
5083 @end menu
5084 @end ifclear
5085
5086 @ifclear CONLY
5087 @cindex C and C++ operators
5088 @node C Operators
5089 @subsubsection C and C++ operators
5090 @end ifclear
5091 @ifset CONLY
5092 @cindex C operators
5093 @node C Operators
5094 @section C operators
5095 @end ifset
5096
5097 Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
5098 @code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are
5099 often defined on groups of types.
5100
5101 @ifclear CONLY
5102 For the purposes of C and C++, the following definitions hold:
5103 @end ifclear
5104
5105 @itemize @bullet
5106 @item
5107 @emph{Integral types} include @code{int} with any of its storage-class
5108 specifiers; @code{char}; and @code{enum}.
5109
5110 @item
5111 @emph{Floating-point types} include @code{float} and @code{double}.
5112
5113 @item
5114 @emph{Pointer types} include all types defined as @code{(@var{type}
5115 *)}.
5116
5117 @item
5118 @emph{Scalar types} include all of the above.
5119 @end itemize
5120
5121 @noindent
5122 The following operators are supported. They are listed here
5123 in order of increasing precedence:
5124
5125 @table @code
5126 @item ,
5127 The comma or sequencing operator. Expressions in a comma-separated list
5128 are evaluated from left to right, with the result of the entire
5129 expression being the last expression evaluated.
5130
5131 @item =
5132 Assignment. The value of an assignment expression is the value
5133 assigned. Defined on scalar types.
5134
5135 @item @var{op}=
5136 Used in an expression of the form @w{@code{@var{a} @var{op}= @var{b}}},
5137 and translated to @w{@code{@var{a} = @var{a op b}}}.
5138 @w{@code{@var{op}=}} and @code{=} have the same precendence.
5139 @var{op} is any one of the operators @code{|}, @code{^}, @code{&},
5140 @code{<<}, @code{>>}, @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{%}.
5141
5142 @item ?:
5143 The ternary operator. @code{@var{a} ? @var{b} : @var{c}} can be thought
5144 of as: if @var{a} then @var{b} else @var{c}. @var{a} should be of an
5145 integral type.
5146
5147 @item ||
5148 Logical @sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
5149
5150 @item &&
5151 Logical @sc{and}. Defined on integral types.
5152
5153 @item |
5154 Bitwise @sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
5155
5156 @item ^
5157 Bitwise exclusive-@sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
5158
5159 @item &
5160 Bitwise @sc{and}. Defined on integral types.
5161
5162 @item ==@r{, }!=
5163 Equality and inequality. Defined on scalar types. The value of these
5164 expressions is 0 for false and non-zero for true.
5165
5166 @item <@r{, }>@r{, }<=@r{, }>=
5167 Less than, greater than, less than or equal, greater than or equal.
5168 Defined on scalar types. The value of these expressions is 0 for false
5169 and non-zero for true.
5170
5171 @item <<@r{, }>>
5172 left shift, and right shift. Defined on integral types.
5173
5174 @item @@
5175 The @value{GDBN} ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
5176
5177 @item +@r{, }-
5178 Addition and subtraction. Defined on integral types, floating-point types and
5179 pointer types.
5180
5181 @item *@r{, }/@r{, }%
5182 Multiplication, division, and modulus. Multiplication and division are
5183 defined on integral and floating-point types. Modulus is defined on
5184 integral types.
5185
5186 @item ++@r{, }--
5187 Increment and decrement. When appearing before a variable, the
5188 operation is performed before the variable is used in an expression;
5189 when appearing after it, the variable's value is used before the
5190 operation takes place.
5191
5192 @item *
5193 Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types. Same precedence as
5194 @code{++}.
5195
5196 @item &
5197 Address operator. Defined on variables. Same precedence as @code{++}.
5198
5199 @ifclear CONLY
5200 For debugging C++, @value{GDBN} implements a use of @samp{&} beyond what is
5201 allowed in the C++ language itself: you can use @samp{&(&@var{ref})}
5202 (or, if you prefer, simply @samp{&&@var{ref}} to examine the address
5203 where a C++ reference variable (declared with @samp{&@var{ref}}) is
5204 stored.
5205 @end ifclear
5206
5207 @item -
5208 Negative. Defined on integral and floating-point types. Same
5209 precedence as @code{++}.
5210
5211 @item !
5212 Logical negation. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
5213 @code{++}.
5214
5215 @item ~
5216 Bitwise complement operator. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
5217 @code{++}.
5218
5219
5220 @item .@r{, }->
5221 Structure member, and pointer-to-structure member. For convenience,
5222 @value{GDBN} regards the two as equivalent, choosing whether to dereference a
5223 pointer based on the stored type information.
5224 Defined on @code{struct} and @code{union} data.
5225
5226 @item []
5227 Array indexing. @code{@var{a}[@var{i}]} is defined as
5228 @code{*(@var{a}+@var{i})}. Same precedence as @code{->}.
5229
5230 @item ()
5231 Function parameter list. Same precedence as @code{->}.
5232
5233 @ifclear CONLY
5234 @item ::
5235 C++ scope resolution operator. Defined on
5236 @code{struct}, @code{union}, and @code{class} types.
5237 @end ifclear
5238
5239 @item ::
5240 Doubled colons
5241 @ifclear CONLY
5242 also
5243 @end ifclear
5244 represent the @value{GDBN} scope operator (@pxref{Expressions,
5245 ,Expressions}).
5246 @ifclear CONLY
5247 Same precedence as @code{::}, above.
5248 @end ifclear
5249 @end table
5250
5251 @ifclear CONLY
5252 @cindex C and C++ constants
5253 @node C Constants
5254 @subsubsection C and C++ constants
5255
5256 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of C and C++ in the
5257 following ways:
5258 @end ifclear
5259 @ifset CONLY
5260 @cindex C constants
5261 @node C Constants
5262 @section C constants
5263
5264 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of C in the
5265 following ways:
5266 @end ifset
5267
5268 @itemize @bullet
5269 @item
5270 Integer constants are a sequence of digits. Octal constants are
5271 specified by a leading @samp{0} (ie. zero), and hexadecimal constants by
5272 a leading @samp{0x} or @samp{0X}. Constants may also end with a letter
5273 @samp{l}, specifying that the constant should be treated as a
5274 @code{long} value.
5275
5276 @item
5277 Floating point constants are a sequence of digits, followed by a decimal
5278 point, followed by a sequence of digits, and optionally followed by an
5279 exponent. An exponent is of the form:
5280 @samp{@w{e@r{[[}+@r{]|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}}, where @var{nnn} is another
5281 sequence of digits. The @samp{+} is optional for positive exponents.
5282
5283 @item
5284 Enumerated constants consist of enumerated identifiers, or their
5285 integral equivalents.
5286
5287 @item
5288 Character constants are a single character surrounded by single quotes
5289 (@code{'}), or a number---the ordinal value of the corresponding character
5290 (usually its @sc{ASCII} value). Within quotes, the single character may
5291 be represented by a letter or by @dfn{escape sequences}, which are of
5292 the form @samp{\@var{nnn}}, where @var{nnn} is the octal representation
5293 of the character's ordinal value; or of the form @samp{\@var{x}}, where
5294 @samp{@var{x}} is a predefined special character---for example,
5295 @samp{\n} for newline.
5296
5297 @item
5298 String constants are a sequence of character constants surrounded
5299 by double quotes (@code{"}).
5300
5301 @item
5302 Pointer constants are an integral value. You can also write pointers
5303 to constants using the C operator @samp{&}.
5304
5305 @item
5306 Array constants are comma-separated lists surrounded by braces @samp{@{}
5307 and @samp{@}}; for example, @samp{@{1,2,3@}} is a three-element array of
5308 integers, @samp{@{@{1,2@}, @{3,4@}, @{5,6@}@}} is a three-by-two array,
5309 and @samp{@{&"hi", &"there", &"fred"@}} is a three-element array of pointers.
5310 @end itemize
5311
5312 @ifclear CONLY
5313 @node Cplus expressions
5314 @subsubsection C++ expressions
5315
5316 @cindex expressions in C++
5317 @value{GDBN} expression handling has a number of extensions to
5318 interpret a significant subset of C++ expressions.
5319
5320 @cindex C++ support, not in @sc{coff}
5321 @cindex @sc{coff} versus C++
5322 @cindex C++ and object formats
5323 @cindex object formats and C++
5324 @cindex a.out and C++
5325 @cindex @sc{ecoff} and C++
5326 @cindex @sc{xcoff} and C++
5327 @cindex @sc{elf}/stabs and C++
5328 @cindex @sc{elf}/@sc{dwarf} and C++
5329 @quotation
5330 @emph{Warning:} Most of these extensions depend on the use of additional
5331 debugging information in the symbol table, and thus require a rich,
5332 extendable object code format. In particular, if your system uses
5333 a.out, MIPS @sc{ecoff}, RS/6000 @sc{xcoff}, or Sun @sc{elf} with stabs
5334 extensions to the symbol table, these facilities are all available.
5335 Where the object code format is standard @sc{coff}, on the other hand,
5336 most of the C++ support in @value{GDBN} will @emph{not} work, nor can it.
5337 For the standard SVr4 debugging format, @sc{dwarf} in @sc{elf}, the
5338 standard is still evolving, so the C++ support in @value{GDBN} is still
5339 fragile; when this debugging format stabilizes, however, C++ support
5340 will also be available on systems that use it.
5341 @end quotation
5342
5343 @enumerate
5344
5345 @cindex member functions
5346 @item
5347 Member function calls are allowed; you can use expressions like
5348
5349 @example
5350 count = aml->GetOriginal(x, y)
5351 @end example
5352
5353 @kindex this
5354 @cindex namespace in C++
5355 @item
5356 While a member function is active (in the selected stack frame), your
5357 expressions have the same namespace available as the member function;
5358 that is, @value{GDBN} allows implicit references to the class instance
5359 pointer @code{this} following the same rules as C++.
5360
5361 @cindex call overloaded functions
5362 @cindex type conversions in C++
5363 @item
5364 You can call overloaded functions; @value{GDBN} will resolve the function
5365 call to the right definition, with one restriction---you must use
5366 arguments of the type required by the function that you want to call.
5367 @value{GDBN} will not perform conversions requiring constructors or
5368 user-defined type operators.
5369
5370 @cindex reference declarations
5371 @item
5372 @value{GDBN} understands variables declared as C++ references; you can use them in
5373 expressions just as you do in C++ source---they are automatically
5374 dereferenced.
5375
5376 In the parameter list shown when @value{GDBN} displays a frame, the values of
5377 reference variables are not displayed (unlike other variables); this
5378 avoids clutter, since references are often used for large structures.
5379 The @emph{address} of a reference variable is always shown, unless
5380 you have specified @samp{set print address off}.
5381
5382 @item
5383 @value{GDBN} supports the C++ name resolution operator @code{::}---your
5384 expressions can use it just as expressions in your program do. Since
5385 one scope may be defined in another, you can use @code{::} repeatedly if
5386 necessary, for example in an expression like
5387 @samp{@var{scope1}::@var{scope2}::@var{name}}. @value{GDBN} also allows
5388 resolving name scope by reference to source files, in both C and C++
5389 debugging (@pxref{Variables, ,Program variables}).
5390 @end enumerate
5391
5392 @node C Defaults
5393 @subsubsection C and C++ defaults
5394 @cindex C and C++ defaults
5395
5396 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set type and range checking automatically, they
5397 both default to @code{off} whenever the working language changes to
5398 C or C++. This happens regardless of whether you, or @value{GDBN},
5399 selected the working language.
5400
5401 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, it sets the
5402 working language to C or C++ on entering code compiled from a source file
5403 whose name ends with @file{.c}, @file{.C}, or @file{.cc}.
5404 @xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language}, for
5405 further details.
5406
5407 @ifset MOD2
5408 @c Type checking is (a) primarily motivated by Modula-2, and (b)
5409 @c unimplemented. If (b) changes, it might make sense to let this node
5410 @c appear even if Mod-2 does not, but meanwhile ignore it. pesch 16jul93.
5411 @node C Checks
5412 @subsubsection C and C++ type and range checks
5413 @cindex C and C++ checks
5414
5415 By default, when @value{GDBN} parses C or C++ expressions, type checking
5416 is not used. However, if you turn type checking on, @value{GDBN} will
5417 consider two variables type equivalent if:
5418
5419 @itemize @bullet
5420 @item
5421 The two variables are structured and have the same structure, union, or
5422 enumerated tag.
5423
5424 @item
5425 Two two variables have the same type name, or types that have been
5426 declared equivalent through @code{typedef}.
5427
5428 @ignore
5429 @c leaving this out because neither J Gilmore nor R Pesch understand it.
5430 @c FIXME--beers?
5431 @item
5432 The two @code{struct}, @code{union}, or @code{enum} variables are
5433 declared in the same declaration. (Note: this may not be true for all C
5434 compilers.)
5435 @end ignore
5436 @end itemize
5437
5438 Range checking, if turned on, is done on mathematical operations. Array
5439 indices are not checked, since they are often used to index a pointer
5440 that is not itself an array.
5441 @end ifset
5442 @end ifclear
5443
5444 @ifclear CONLY
5445 @node Debugging C
5446 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} and C
5447 @end ifclear
5448 @ifset CONLY
5449 @node Debugging C
5450 @section @value{GDBN} and C
5451 @end ifset
5452
5453 The @code{set print union} and @code{show print union} commands apply to
5454 the @code{union} type. When set to @samp{on}, any @code{union} that is
5455 inside a @code{struct}
5456 @ifclear CONLY
5457 or @code{class}
5458 @end ifclear
5459 will also be printed.
5460 Otherwise, it will appear as @samp{@{...@}}.
5461
5462 The @code{@@} operator aids in the debugging of dynamic arrays, formed
5463 with pointers and a memory allocation function. @xref{Expressions,
5464 ,Expressions}.
5465
5466 @ifclear CONLY
5467 @node Debugging C plus plus
5468 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} features for C++
5469
5470 @cindex commands for C++
5471 Some @value{GDBN} commands are particularly useful with C++, and some are
5472 designed specifically for use with C++. Here is a summary:
5473
5474 @table @code
5475 @cindex break in overloaded functions
5476 @item @r{breakpoint menus}
5477 When you want a breakpoint in a function whose name is overloaded,
5478 @value{GDBN} breakpoint menus help you specify which function definition
5479 you want. @xref{Breakpoint Menus,,Breakpoint menus}.
5480
5481 @cindex overloading in C++
5482 @item rbreak @var{regex}
5483 Setting breakpoints using regular expressions is helpful for setting
5484 breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
5485 classes.
5486 @xref{Set Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}.
5487
5488 @cindex C++ exception handling
5489 @item catch @var{exceptions}
5490 @itemx info catch
5491 Debug C++ exception handling using these commands. @xref{Exception
5492 Handling, ,Breakpoints and exceptions}.
5493
5494 @cindex inheritance
5495 @item ptype @var{typename}
5496 Print inheritance relationships as well as other information for type
5497 @var{typename}.
5498 @xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}.
5499
5500 @cindex C++ symbol display
5501 @item set print demangle
5502 @itemx show print demangle
5503 @itemx set print asm-demangle
5504 @itemx show print asm-demangle
5505 Control whether C++ symbols display in their source form, both when
5506 displaying code as C++ source and when displaying disassemblies.
5507 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
5508
5509 @item set print object
5510 @itemx show print object
5511 Choose whether to print derived (actual) or declared types of objects.
5512 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
5513
5514 @item set print vtbl
5515 @itemx show print vtbl
5516 Control the format for printing virtual function tables.
5517 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
5518
5519 @item @r{Overloaded symbol names}
5520 You can specify a particular definition of an overloaded symbol, using
5521 the same notation that is used to declare such symbols in C++: type
5522 @code{@var{symbol}(@var{types})} rather than just @var{symbol}. You can
5523 also use the @value{GDBN} command-line word completion facilities to list the
5524 available choices, or to finish the type list for you.
5525 @xref{Completion,, Command completion}, for details on how to do this.
5526 @end table
5527 @ifclear MOD2
5528 @c cancels "up" under same conditions near bgn of chapter
5529 @down
5530 @end ifclear
5531
5532 @ifset MOD2
5533 @node Modula-2
5534 @subsection Modula-2
5535 @cindex Modula-2
5536
5537 The extensions made to @value{GDBN} to support Modula-2 only support
5538 output from the GNU Modula-2 compiler (which is currently being
5539 developed). Other Modula-2 compilers are not currently supported, and
5540 attempting to debug executables produced by them will most likely
5541 result in an error as @value{GDBN} reads in the executable's symbol
5542 table.
5543
5544 @cindex expressions in Modula-2
5545 @menu
5546 * M2 Operators:: Built-in operators
5547 * Built-In Func/Proc:: Built-in functions and procedures
5548 * M2 Constants:: Modula-2 constants
5549 * M2 Defaults:: Default settings for Modula-2
5550 * Deviations:: Deviations from standard Modula-2
5551 * M2 Checks:: Modula-2 type and range checks
5552 * M2 Scope:: The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
5553 * GDB/M2:: @value{GDBN} and Modula-2
5554 @end menu
5555
5556 @node M2 Operators
5557 @subsubsection Operators
5558 @cindex Modula-2 operators
5559
5560 Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
5561 @code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are
5562 often defined on groups of types. For the purposes of Modula-2, the
5563 following definitions hold:
5564
5565 @itemize @bullet
5566
5567 @item
5568 @emph{Integral types} consist of @code{INTEGER}, @code{CARDINAL}, and
5569 their subranges.
5570
5571 @item
5572 @emph{Character types} consist of @code{CHAR} and its subranges.
5573
5574 @item
5575 @emph{Floating-point types} consist of @code{REAL}.
5576
5577 @item
5578 @emph{Pointer types} consist of anything declared as @code{POINTER TO
5579 @var{type}}.
5580
5581 @item
5582 @emph{Scalar types} consist of all of the above.
5583
5584 @item
5585 @emph{Set types} consist of @code{SET} and @code{BITSET} types.
5586
5587 @item
5588 @emph{Boolean types} consist of @code{BOOLEAN}.
5589 @end itemize
5590
5591 @noindent
5592 The following operators are supported, and appear in order of
5593 increasing precedence:
5594
5595 @table @code
5596 @item ,
5597 Function argument or array index separator.
5598
5599 @item :=
5600 Assignment. The value of @var{var} @code{:=} @var{value} is
5601 @var{value}.
5602
5603 @item <@r{, }>
5604 Less than, greater than on integral, floating-point, or enumerated
5605 types.
5606
5607 @item <=@r{, }>=
5608 Less than, greater than, less than or equal to, greater than or equal to
5609 on integral, floating-point and enumerated types, or set inclusion on
5610 set types. Same precedence as @code{<}.
5611
5612 @item =@r{, }<>@r{, }#
5613 Equality and two ways of expressing inequality, valid on scalar types.
5614 Same precedence as @code{<}. In @value{GDBN} scripts, only @code{<>} is
5615 available for inequality, since @code{#} conflicts with the script
5616 comment character.
5617
5618 @item IN
5619 Set membership. Defined on set types and the types of their members.
5620 Same precedence as @code{<}.
5621
5622 @item OR
5623 Boolean disjunction. Defined on boolean types.
5624
5625 @item AND@r{, }&
5626 Boolean conjuction. Defined on boolean types.
5627
5628 @item @@
5629 The @value{GDBN} ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
5630
5631 @item +@r{, }-
5632 Addition and subtraction on integral and floating-point types, or union
5633 and difference on set types.
5634
5635 @item *
5636 Multiplication on integral and floating-point types, or set intersection
5637 on set types.
5638
5639 @item /
5640 Division on floating-point types, or symmetric set difference on set
5641 types. Same precedence as @code{*}.
5642
5643 @item DIV@r{, }MOD
5644 Integer division and remainder. Defined on integral types. Same
5645 precedence as @code{*}.
5646
5647 @item -
5648 Negative. Defined on @code{INTEGER} and @code{REAL} data.
5649
5650 @item ^
5651 Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types.
5652
5653 @item NOT
5654 Boolean negation. Defined on boolean types. Same precedence as
5655 @code{^}.
5656
5657 @item .
5658 @code{RECORD} field selector. Defined on @code{RECORD} data. Same
5659 precedence as @code{^}.
5660
5661 @item []
5662 Array indexing. Defined on @code{ARRAY} data. Same precedence as @code{^}.
5663
5664 @item ()
5665 Procedure argument list. Defined on @code{PROCEDURE} objects. Same precedence
5666 as @code{^}.
5667
5668 @item ::@r{, }.
5669 @value{GDBN} and Modula-2 scope operators.
5670 @end table
5671
5672 @quotation
5673 @emph{Warning:} Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so @value{GDBN}
5674 will treat the use of the operator @code{IN}, or the use of operators
5675 @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{=}, , @code{<>}, @code{#},
5676 @code{<=}, and @code{>=} on sets as an error.
5677 @end quotation
5678
5679 @cindex Modula-2 built-ins
5680 @node Built-In Func/Proc
5681 @subsubsection Built-in functions and procedures
5682
5683 Modula-2 also makes available several built-in procedures and functions.
5684 In describing these, the following metavariables are used:
5685
5686 @table @var
5687
5688 @item a
5689 represents an @code{ARRAY} variable.
5690
5691 @item c
5692 represents a @code{CHAR} constant or variable.
5693
5694 @item i
5695 represents a variable or constant of integral type.
5696
5697 @item m
5698 represents an identifier that belongs to a set. Generally used in the
5699 same function with the metavariable @var{s}. The type of @var{s} should
5700 be @code{SET OF @var{mtype}} (where @var{mtype} is the type of @var{m}.
5701
5702 @item n
5703 represents a variable or constant of integral or floating-point type.
5704
5705 @item r
5706 represents a variable or constant of floating-point type.
5707
5708 @item t
5709 represents a type.
5710
5711 @item v
5712 represents a variable.
5713
5714 @item x
5715 represents a variable or constant of one of many types. See the
5716 explanation of the function for details.
5717 @end table
5718
5719 All Modula-2 built-in procedures also return a result, described below.
5720
5721 @table @code
5722 @item ABS(@var{n})
5723 Returns the absolute value of @var{n}.
5724
5725 @item CAP(@var{c})
5726 If @var{c} is a lower case letter, it returns its upper case
5727 equivalent, otherwise it returns its argument
5728
5729 @item CHR(@var{i})
5730 Returns the character whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
5731
5732 @item DEC(@var{v})
5733 Decrements the value in the variable @var{v}. Returns the new value.
5734
5735 @item DEC(@var{v},@var{i})
5736 Decrements the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}. Returns the
5737 new value.
5738
5739 @item EXCL(@var{m},@var{s})
5740 Removes the element @var{m} from the set @var{s}. Returns the new
5741 set.
5742
5743 @item FLOAT(@var{i})
5744 Returns the floating point equivalent of the integer @var{i}.
5745
5746 @item HIGH(@var{a})
5747 Returns the index of the last member of @var{a}.
5748
5749 @item INC(@var{v})
5750 Increments the value in the variable @var{v}. Returns the new value.
5751
5752 @item INC(@var{v},@var{i})
5753 Increments the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}. Returns the
5754 new value.
5755
5756 @item INCL(@var{m},@var{s})
5757 Adds the element @var{m} to the set @var{s} if it is not already
5758 there. Returns the new set.
5759
5760 @item MAX(@var{t})
5761 Returns the maximum value of the type @var{t}.
5762
5763 @item MIN(@var{t})
5764 Returns the minimum value of the type @var{t}.
5765
5766 @item ODD(@var{i})
5767 Returns boolean TRUE if @var{i} is an odd number.
5768
5769 @item ORD(@var{x})
5770 Returns the ordinal value of its argument. For example, the ordinal
5771 value of a character is its ASCII value (on machines supporting the
5772 ASCII character set). @var{x} must be of an ordered type, which include
5773 integral, character and enumerated types.
5774
5775 @item SIZE(@var{x})
5776 Returns the size of its argument. @var{x} can be a variable or a type.
5777
5778 @item TRUNC(@var{r})
5779 Returns the integral part of @var{r}.
5780
5781 @item VAL(@var{t},@var{i})
5782 Returns the member of the type @var{t} whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
5783 @end table
5784
5785 @quotation
5786 @emph{Warning:} Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so
5787 @value{GDBN} will treat the use of procedures @code{INCL} and @code{EXCL} as
5788 an error.
5789 @end quotation
5790
5791 @cindex Modula-2 constants
5792 @node M2 Constants
5793 @subsubsection Constants
5794
5795 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of Modula-2 in the following
5796 ways:
5797
5798 @itemize @bullet
5799
5800 @item
5801 Integer constants are simply a sequence of digits. When used in an
5802 expression, a constant is interpreted to be type-compatible with the
5803 rest of the expression. Hexadecimal integers are specified by a
5804 trailing @samp{H}, and octal integers by a trailing @samp{B}.
5805
5806 @item
5807 Floating point constants appear as a sequence of digits, followed by a
5808 decimal point and another sequence of digits. An optional exponent can
5809 then be specified, in the form @samp{E@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}, where
5810 @samp{@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}} is the desired exponent. All of the
5811 digits of the floating point constant must be valid decimal (base 10)
5812 digits.
5813
5814 @item
5815 Character constants consist of a single character enclosed by a pair of
5816 like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}). They may
5817 also be expressed by their ordinal value (their ASCII value, usually)
5818 followed by a @samp{C}.
5819
5820 @item
5821 String constants consist of a sequence of characters enclosed by a
5822 pair of like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}).
5823 Escape sequences in the style of C are also allowed. @xref{C
5824 Constants, ,C and C++ constants}, for a brief explanation of escape
5825 sequences.
5826
5827 @item
5828 Enumerated constants consist of an enumerated identifier.
5829
5830 @item
5831 Boolean constants consist of the identifiers @code{TRUE} and
5832 @code{FALSE}.
5833
5834 @item
5835 Pointer constants consist of integral values only.
5836
5837 @item
5838 Set constants are not yet supported.
5839 @end itemize
5840
5841 @node M2 Defaults
5842 @subsubsection Modula-2 defaults
5843 @cindex Modula-2 defaults
5844
5845 If type and range checking are set automatically by @value{GDBN}, they
5846 both default to @code{on} whenever the working language changes to
5847 Modula-2. This happens regardless of whether you, or @value{GDBN},
5848 selected the working language.
5849
5850 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, then entering
5851 code compiled from a file whose name ends with @file{.mod} will set the
5852 working language to Modula-2. @xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} set
5853 the language automatically}, for further details.
5854
5855 @node Deviations
5856 @subsubsection Deviations from standard Modula-2
5857 @cindex Modula-2, deviations from
5858
5859 A few changes have been made to make Modula-2 programs easier to debug.
5860 This is done primarily via loosening its type strictness:
5861
5862 @itemize @bullet
5863 @item
5864 Unlike in standard Modula-2, pointer constants can be formed by
5865 integers. This allows you to modify pointer variables during
5866 debugging. (In standard Modula-2, the actual address contained in a
5867 pointer variable is hidden from you; it can only be modified
5868 through direct assignment to another pointer variable or expression that
5869 returned a pointer.)
5870
5871 @item
5872 C escape sequences can be used in strings and characters to represent
5873 non-printable characters. @value{GDBN} will print out strings with these
5874 escape sequences embedded. Single non-printable characters are
5875 printed using the @samp{CHR(@var{nnn})} format.
5876
5877 @item
5878 The assignment operator (@code{:=}) returns the value of its right-hand
5879 argument.
5880
5881 @item
5882 All built-in procedures both modify @emph{and} return their argument.
5883 @end itemize
5884
5885 @node M2 Checks
5886 @subsubsection Modula-2 type and range checks
5887 @cindex Modula-2 checks
5888
5889 @quotation
5890 @emph{Warning:} in this release, @value{GDBN} does not yet perform type or
5891 range checking.
5892 @end quotation
5893 @c FIXME remove warning when type/range checks added
5894
5895 @value{GDBN} considers two Modula-2 variables type equivalent if:
5896
5897 @itemize @bullet
5898 @item
5899 They are of types that have been declared equivalent via a @code{TYPE
5900 @var{t1} = @var{t2}} statement
5901
5902 @item
5903 They have been declared on the same line. (Note: This is true of the
5904 GNU Modula-2 compiler, but it may not be true of other compilers.)
5905 @end itemize
5906
5907 As long as type checking is enabled, any attempt to combine variables
5908 whose types are not equivalent is an error.
5909
5910 Range checking is done on all mathematical operations, assignment, array
5911 index bounds, and all built-in functions and procedures.
5912
5913 @node M2 Scope
5914 @subsubsection The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
5915 @cindex scope
5916 @kindex .
5917 @cindex colon, doubled as scope operator
5918 @ifinfo
5919 @kindex colon-colon
5920 @c Info cannot handle :: but TeX can.
5921 @end ifinfo
5922 @iftex
5923 @kindex ::
5924 @end iftex
5925
5926 There are a few subtle differences between the Modula-2 scope operator
5927 (@code{.}) and the @value{GDBN} scope operator (@code{::}). The two have
5928 similar syntax:
5929
5930 @example
5931
5932 @var{module} . @var{id}
5933 @var{scope} :: @var{id}
5934 @end example
5935
5936 @noindent
5937 where @var{scope} is the name of a module or a procedure,
5938 @var{module} the name of a module, and @var{id} is any declared
5939 identifier within your program, except another module.
5940
5941 Using the @code{::} operator makes @value{GDBN} search the scope
5942 specified by @var{scope} for the identifier @var{id}. If it is not
5943 found in the specified scope, then @value{GDBN} will search all scopes
5944 enclosing the one specified by @var{scope}.
5945
5946 Using the @code{.} operator makes @value{GDBN} search the current scope for
5947 the identifier specified by @var{id} that was imported from the
5948 definition module specified by @var{module}. With this operator, it is
5949 an error if the identifier @var{id} was not imported from definition
5950 module @var{module}, or if @var{id} is not an identifier in
5951 @var{module}.
5952
5953 @node GDB/M2
5954 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} and Modula-2
5955
5956 Some @value{GDBN} commands have little use when debugging Modula-2 programs.
5957 Five subcommands of @code{set print} and @code{show print} apply
5958 specifically to C and C++: @samp{vtbl}, @samp{demangle},
5959 @samp{asm-demangle}, @samp{object}, and @samp{union}. The first four
5960 apply to C++, and the last to the C @code{union} type, which has no direct
5961 analogue in Modula-2.
5962
5963 The @code{@@} operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}), while available
5964 while using any language, is not useful with Modula-2. Its
5965 intent is to aid the debugging of @dfn{dynamic arrays}, which cannot be
5966 created in Modula-2 as they can in C or C++. However, because an
5967 address can be specified by an integral constant, the construct
5968 @samp{@{@var{type}@}@var{adrexp}} is still useful. (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions})
5969
5970 @cindex @code{#} in Modula-2
5971 In @value{GDBN} scripts, the Modula-2 inequality operator @code{#} is
5972 interpreted as the beginning of a comment. Use @code{<>} instead.
5973
5974 @end ifset
5975 @end ifclear
5976
5977 @node Symbols
5978 @chapter Examining the Symbol Table
5979
5980 The commands described in this section allow you to inquire about the
5981 symbols (names of variables, functions and types) defined in your
5982 program. This information is inherent in the text of your program and
5983 does not change as your program executes. @value{GDBN} finds it in your
5984 program's symbol table, in the file indicated when you started @value{GDBN}
5985 (@pxref{File Options, ,Choosing files}), or by one of the
5986 file-management commands (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
5987
5988 @c FIXME! This might be intentionally specific to C and C++; if so, move
5989 @c to someplace in C section of lang chapter.
5990 @cindex symbol names
5991 @cindex names of symbols
5992 @cindex quoting names
5993 Occasionally, you may need to refer to symbols that contain unusual
5994 characters, which @value{GDBN} ordinarily treats as word delimiters. The
5995 most frequent case is in referring to static variables in other
5996 source files (@pxref{Variables,,Program variables}). File names
5997 are recorded in object files as debugging symbols, but @value{GDBN} would
5998 ordinarily parse a typical file name, like @file{foo.c}, as the three words
5999 @samp{foo} @samp{.} @samp{c}. To allow @value{GDBN} to recognize
6000 @samp{foo.c} as a single symbol, enclose it in single quotes; for example,
6001
6002 @example
6003 p 'foo.c'::x
6004 @end example
6005
6006 @noindent
6007 looks up the value of @code{x} in the scope of the file @file{foo.c}.
6008
6009 @table @code
6010 @item info address @var{symbol}
6011 @kindex info address
6012 Describe where the data for @var{symbol} is stored. For a register
6013 variable, this says which register it is kept in. For a non-register
6014 local variable, this prints the stack-frame offset at which the variable
6015 is always stored.
6016
6017 Note the contrast with @samp{print &@var{symbol}}, which does not work
6018 at all for a register variables, and for a stack local variable prints
6019 the exact address of the current instantiation of the variable.
6020
6021 @item whatis @var{exp}
6022 @kindex whatis
6023 Print the data type of expression @var{exp}. @var{exp} is not
6024 actually evaluated, and any side-effecting operations (such as
6025 assignments or function calls) inside it do not take place.
6026 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
6027
6028 @item whatis
6029 Print the data type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
6030
6031 @item ptype @var{typename}
6032 @kindex ptype
6033 Print a description of data type @var{typename}. @var{typename} may be
6034 the name of a type, or for C code it may have the form
6035 @samp{struct @var{struct-tag}}, @samp{union @var{union-tag}} or
6036 @samp{enum @var{enum-tag}}.
6037
6038 @item ptype @var{exp}
6039 @itemx ptype
6040 Print a description of the type of expression @var{exp}. @code{ptype}
6041 differs from @code{whatis} by printing a detailed description, instead
6042 of just the name of the type.
6043
6044 For example, for this variable declaration:
6045
6046 @example
6047 struct complex @{double real; double imag;@} v;
6048 @end example
6049
6050 @noindent
6051 the two commands give this output:
6052
6053 @example
6054 @group
6055 (@value{GDBP}) whatis v
6056 type = struct complex
6057 (@value{GDBP}) ptype v
6058 type = struct complex @{
6059 double real;
6060 double imag;
6061 @}
6062 @end group
6063 @end example
6064
6065 @noindent
6066 As with @code{whatis}, using @code{ptype} without an argument refers to
6067 the type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
6068
6069 @item info types @var{regexp}
6070 @itemx info types
6071 @kindex info types
6072 Print a brief description of all types whose name matches @var{regexp}
6073 (or all types in your program, if you supply no argument). Each
6074 complete typename is matched as though it were a complete line; thus,
6075 @samp{i type value} gives information on all types in your program whose
6076 name includes the string @code{value}, but @samp{i type ^value$} gives
6077 information only on types whose complete name is @code{value}.
6078
6079 This command differs from @code{ptype} in two ways: first, like
6080 @code{whatis}, it does not print a detailed description; second, it
6081 lists all source files where a type is defined.
6082
6083 @item info source
6084 @kindex info source
6085 Show the name of the current source file---that is, the source file for
6086 the function containing the current point of execution---and the language
6087 it was written in.
6088
6089 @item info sources
6090 @kindex info sources
6091 Print the names of all source files in your program for which there is
6092 debugging information, organized into two lists: files whose symbols
6093 have already been read, and files whose symbols will be read when needed.
6094
6095 @item info functions
6096 @kindex info functions
6097 Print the names and data types of all defined functions.
6098
6099 @item info functions @var{regexp}
6100 Print the names and data types of all defined functions
6101 whose names contain a match for regular expression @var{regexp}.
6102 Thus, @samp{info fun step} finds all functions whose names
6103 include @code{step}; @samp{info fun ^step} finds those whose names
6104 start with @code{step}.
6105
6106 @item info variables
6107 @kindex info variables
6108 Print the names and data types of all variables that are declared
6109 outside of functions (i.e., excluding local variables).
6110
6111 @item info variables @var{regexp}
6112 Print the names and data types of all variables (except for local
6113 variables) whose names contain a match for regular expression
6114 @var{regexp}.
6115
6116 @ignore
6117 This was never implemented.
6118 @item info methods
6119 @itemx info methods @var{regexp}
6120 @kindex info methods
6121 The @code{info methods} command permits the user to examine all defined
6122 methods within C++ program, or (with the @var{regexp} argument) a
6123 specific set of methods found in the various C++ classes. Many
6124 C++ classes provide a large number of methods. Thus, the output
6125 from the @code{ptype} command can be overwhelming and hard to use. The
6126 @code{info-methods} command filters the methods, printing only those
6127 which match the regular-expression @var{regexp}.
6128 @end ignore
6129
6130 @item maint print symbols @var{filename}
6131 @itemx maint print psymbols @var{filename}
6132 @itemx maint print msymbols @var{filename}
6133 @kindex maint print symbols
6134 @cindex symbol dump
6135 @kindex maint print psymbols
6136 @cindex partial symbol dump
6137 Write a dump of debugging symbol data into the file @var{filename}.
6138 These commands are used to debug the @value{GDBN} symbol-reading code. Only
6139 symbols with debugging data are included. If you use @samp{maint print
6140 symbols}, @value{GDBN} includes all the symbols for which it has already
6141 collected full details: that is, @var{filename} reflects symbols for
6142 only those files whose symbols @value{GDBN} has read. You can use the
6143 command @code{info sources} to find out which files these are. If you
6144 use @samp{maint print psymbols} instead, the dump shows information about
6145 symbols that @value{GDBN} only knows partially---that is, symbols defined in
6146 files that @value{GDBN} has skimmed, but not yet read completely. Finally,
6147 @samp{maint print msymbols} dumps just the minimal symbol information
6148 required for each object file from which @value{GDBN} has read some symbols.
6149 @xref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}, for a discussion of how
6150 @value{GDBN} reads symbols (in the description of @code{symbol-file}).
6151 @end table
6152
6153 @node Altering
6154 @chapter Altering Execution
6155
6156 Once you think you have found an error in your program, you might want to
6157 find out for certain whether correcting the apparent error would lead to
6158 correct results in the rest of the run. You can find the answer by
6159 experiment, using the @value{GDBN} features for altering execution of the
6160 program.
6161
6162 For example, you can store new values into variables or memory
6163 locations,
6164 @ifclear BARETARGET
6165 give your program a signal, restart it
6166 @end ifclear
6167 @ifset BARETARGET
6168 restart your program
6169 @end ifset
6170 at a different address, or even return prematurely from a function to
6171 its caller.
6172
6173 @menu
6174 * Assignment:: Assignment to variables
6175 * Jumping:: Continuing at a different address
6176 @ifclear BARETARGET
6177 * Signaling:: Giving your program a signal
6178 @end ifclear
6179
6180 * Returning:: Returning from a function
6181 * Calling:: Calling your program's functions
6182 * Patching:: Patching your program
6183 @end menu
6184
6185 @node Assignment
6186 @section Assignment to variables
6187
6188 @cindex assignment
6189 @cindex setting variables
6190 To alter the value of a variable, evaluate an assignment expression.
6191 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}. For example,
6192
6193 @example
6194 print x=4
6195 @end example
6196
6197 @noindent
6198 stores the value 4 into the variable @code{x}, and then prints the
6199 value of the assignment expression (which is 4).
6200 @ifclear CONLY
6201 @xref{Languages, ,Using @value{GDBN} with Different Languages}, for more
6202 information on operators in supported languages.
6203 @end ifclear
6204
6205 @kindex set variable
6206 @cindex variables, setting
6207 If you are not interested in seeing the value of the assignment, use the
6208 @code{set} command instead of the @code{print} command. @code{set} is
6209 really the same as @code{print} except that the expression's value is
6210 not printed and is not put in the value history (@pxref{Value History,
6211 ,Value history}). The expression is evaluated only for its effects.
6212
6213 If the beginning of the argument string of the @code{set} command
6214 appears identical to a @code{set} subcommand, use the @code{set
6215 variable} command instead of just @code{set}. This command is identical
6216 to @code{set} except for its lack of subcommands. For example, if
6217 your program has a variable @code{width}, you get
6218 an error if you try to set a new value with just @samp{set width=13},
6219 because @value{GDBN} has the command @code{set width}:
6220
6221 @example
6222 (@value{GDBP}) whatis width
6223 type = double
6224 (@value{GDBP}) p width
6225 $4 = 13
6226 (@value{GDBP}) set width=47
6227 Invalid syntax in expression.
6228 @end example
6229
6230 @noindent
6231 The invalid expression, of course, is @samp{=47}. In
6232 order to actually set the program's variable @code{width}, use
6233
6234 @example
6235 (@value{GDBP}) set var width=47
6236 @end example
6237
6238 @value{GDBN} allows more implicit conversions in assignments than C; you can
6239 freely store an integer value into a pointer variable or vice versa,
6240 and you can convert any structure to any other structure that is the
6241 same length or shorter.
6242 @comment FIXME: how do structs align/pad in these conversions?
6243 @comment /pesch@cygnus.com 18dec1990
6244
6245 To store values into arbitrary places in memory, use the @samp{@{@dots{}@}}
6246 construct to generate a value of specified type at a specified address
6247 (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}). For example, @code{@{int@}0x83040} refers
6248 to memory location @code{0x83040} as an integer (which implies a certain size
6249 and representation in memory), and
6250
6251 @example
6252 set @{int@}0x83040 = 4
6253 @end example
6254
6255 @noindent
6256 stores the value 4 into that memory location.
6257
6258 @node Jumping
6259 @section Continuing at a different address
6260
6261 Ordinarily, when you continue your program, you do so at the place where
6262 it stopped, with the @code{continue} command. You can instead continue at
6263 an address of your own choosing, with the following commands:
6264
6265 @table @code
6266 @item jump @var{linespec}
6267 @kindex jump
6268 Resume execution at line @var{linespec}. Execution will stop
6269 immediately if there is a breakpoint there. @xref{List, ,Printing
6270 source lines}, for a description of the different forms of
6271 @var{linespec}.
6272
6273 The @code{jump} command does not change the current stack frame, or
6274 the stack pointer, or the contents of any memory location or any
6275 register other than the program counter. If line @var{linespec} is in
6276 a different function from the one currently executing, the results may
6277 be bizarre if the two functions expect different patterns of arguments or
6278 of local variables. For this reason, the @code{jump} command requests
6279 confirmation if the specified line is not in the function currently
6280 executing. However, even bizarre results are predictable if you are
6281 well acquainted with the machine-language code of your program.
6282
6283 @item jump *@var{address}
6284 Resume execution at the instruction at address @var{address}.
6285 @end table
6286
6287 You can get much the same effect as the @code{jump} command by storing a
6288 new value into the register @code{$pc}. The difference is that this
6289 does not start your program running; it only changes the address where it
6290 @emph{will} run when it is continued. For example,
6291
6292 @example
6293 set $pc = 0x485
6294 @end example
6295
6296 @noindent
6297 causes the next @code{continue} command or stepping command to execute at
6298 address @code{0x485}, rather than at the address where your program stopped.
6299 @xref{Continuing and Stepping, ,Continuing and stepping}.
6300
6301 The most common occasion to use the @code{jump} command is to back up,
6302 perhaps with more breakpoints set, over a portion of a program that has
6303 already executed, in order to examine its execution in more detail.
6304
6305 @ifclear BARETARGET
6306 @c @group
6307 @node Signaling
6308 @section Giving your program a signal
6309
6310 @table @code
6311 @item signal @var{signalnum}
6312 @kindex signal
6313 Resume execution where your program stopped, but give it immediately the
6314 signal number @var{signalnum}.
6315
6316 Alternatively, if @var{signalnum} is zero, continue execution without
6317 giving a signal. This is useful when your program stopped on account of
6318 a signal and would ordinary see the signal when resumed with the
6319 @code{continue} command; @samp{signal 0} causes it to resume without a
6320 signal.
6321
6322 @code{signal} does not repeat when you press @key{RET} a second time
6323 after executing the command.
6324 @end table
6325 @c @end group
6326 @end ifclear
6327
6328 @node Returning
6329 @section Returning from a function
6330
6331 @table @code
6332 @item return
6333 @itemx return @var{expression}
6334 @cindex returning from a function
6335 @kindex return
6336 You can cancel execution of a function call with the @code{return}
6337 command. If you give an
6338 @var{expression} argument, its value is used as the function's return
6339 value.
6340 @end table
6341
6342 When you use @code{return}, @value{GDBN} discards the selected stack frame
6343 (and all frames within it). You can think of this as making the
6344 discarded frame return prematurely. If you wish to specify a value to
6345 be returned, give that value as the argument to @code{return}.
6346
6347 This pops the selected stack frame (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a
6348 frame}), and any other frames inside of it, leaving its caller as the
6349 innermost remaining frame. That frame becomes selected. The
6350 specified value is stored in the registers used for returning values
6351 of functions.
6352
6353 The @code{return} command does not resume execution; it leaves the
6354 program stopped in the state that would exist if the function had just
6355 returned. In contrast, the @code{finish} command (@pxref{Continuing
6356 and Stepping, ,Continuing and stepping}) resumes execution until the
6357 selected stack frame returns naturally.
6358
6359 @node Calling
6360 @section Calling program functions
6361
6362 @cindex calling functions
6363 @kindex call
6364 @table @code
6365 @item call @var{expr}
6366 Evaluate the expression @var{expr} without displaying @code{void}
6367 returned values.
6368 @end table
6369
6370 You can use this variant of the @code{print} command if you want to
6371 execute a function from your program, but without cluttering the output
6372 with @code{void} returned values. The result is printed and saved in
6373 the value history, if it is not void.
6374
6375 @node Patching
6376 @section Patching programs
6377 @cindex patching binaries
6378 @cindex writing into executables
6379 @ifclear BARETARGET
6380 @cindex writing into corefiles
6381 @end ifclear
6382
6383 By default, @value{GDBN} opens the file containing your program's executable
6384 code
6385 @ifclear BARETARGET
6386 (or the corefile)
6387 @end ifclear
6388 read-only. This prevents accidental alterations
6389 to machine code; but it also prevents you from intentionally patching
6390 your program's binary.
6391
6392 If you'd like to be able to patch the binary, you can specify that
6393 explicitly with the @code{set write} command. For example, you might
6394 want to turn on internal debugging flags, or even to make emergency
6395 repairs.
6396
6397 @table @code
6398 @item set write on
6399 @itemx set write off
6400 @kindex set write
6401 If you specify @samp{set write on}, @value{GDBN} will open executable
6402 @ifclear BARETARGET
6403 and core
6404 @end ifclear
6405 files for both reading and writing; if you specify @samp{set write
6406 off} (the default), @value{GDBN} will open them read-only.
6407
6408 If you have already loaded a file, you must load it again (using the
6409 @code{exec-file}
6410 @ifclear BARETARGET
6411 or @code{core-file}
6412 @end ifclear
6413 command) after changing @code{set write}, for your new setting to take
6414 effect.
6415
6416 @item show write
6417 @kindex show write
6418 Display whether executable files
6419 @ifclear BARETARGET
6420 and core files
6421 @end ifclear
6422 will be opened for writing as well as reading.
6423 @end table
6424
6425 @node GDB Files
6426 @chapter @value{GDBN} Files
6427
6428 @value{GDBN} needs to know the file name of the program to be debugged, both in
6429 order to read its symbol table and in order to start your program.
6430 @ifclear BARETARGET
6431 To debug a core dump of a previous run, you must also tell @value{GDBN}
6432 the name of the core dump file.
6433 @end ifclear
6434
6435 @menu
6436 * Files:: Commands to specify files
6437 * Symbol Errors:: Errors reading symbol files
6438 @end menu
6439
6440 @node Files
6441 @section Commands to specify files
6442 @cindex symbol table
6443
6444 @ifclear BARETARGET
6445 @cindex core dump file
6446 The usual way to specify executable and core dump file names is with
6447 the command arguments given when you start @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Invocation,
6448 ,Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}}.
6449 @end ifclear
6450 @ifset BARETARGET
6451 The usual way to specify an executable file name is with
6452 the command argument given when you start @value{GDBN}, (@pxref{Invocation,
6453 ,Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}}.
6454 @end ifset
6455
6456 Occasionally it is necessary to change to a different file during a
6457 @value{GDBN} session. Or you may run @value{GDBN} and forget to specify
6458 a file you want to use. In these situations the @value{GDBN} commands
6459 to specify new files are useful.
6460
6461 @table @code
6462 @item file @var{filename}
6463 @cindex executable file
6464 @kindex file
6465 Use @var{filename} as the program to be debugged. It is read for its
6466 symbols and for the contents of pure memory. It is also the program
6467 executed when you use the @code{run} command. If you do not specify a
6468 directory and the file is not found in the @value{GDBN} working directory, @value{GDBN}
6469 uses the environment variable @code{PATH} as a list of directories to
6470 search, just as the shell does when looking for a program to run. You
6471 can change the value of this variable, for both @value{GDBN} and your program,
6472 using the @code{path} command.
6473
6474 On systems with memory-mapped files, an auxiliary symbol table file
6475 @file{@var{filename}.syms} may be available for @var{filename}. If it
6476 is, @value{GDBN} will map in the symbol table from
6477 @file{@var{filename}.syms}, starting up more quickly. See the
6478 descriptions of the options @samp{-mapped} and @samp{-readnow} (available
6479 on the command line, and with the commands @code{file}, @code{symbol-file},
6480 or @code{add-symbol-file}), for more information.
6481
6482 @item file
6483 @code{file} with no argument makes @value{GDBN} discard any information it
6484 has on both executable file and the symbol table.
6485
6486 @item exec-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6487 @kindex exec-file
6488 Specify that the program to be run (but not the symbol table) is found
6489 in @var{filename}. @value{GDBN} will search the environment variable @code{PATH}
6490 if necessary to locate your program. Omitting @var{filename} means to
6491 discard information on the executable file.
6492
6493 @item symbol-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6494 @kindex symbol-file
6495 Read symbol table information from file @var{filename}. @code{PATH} is
6496 searched when necessary. Use the @code{file} command to get both symbol
6497 table and program to run from the same file.
6498
6499 @code{symbol-file} with no argument clears out @value{GDBN} information on your
6500 program's symbol table.
6501
6502 The @code{symbol-file} command causes @value{GDBN} to forget the contents of its
6503 convenience variables, the value history, and all breakpoints and
6504 auto-display expressions. This is because they may contain pointers to
6505 the internal data recording symbols and data types, which are part of
6506 the old symbol table data being discarded inside @value{GDBN}.
6507
6508 @code{symbol-file} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after
6509 executing it once.
6510
6511 When @value{GDBN} is configured for a particular environment, it will
6512 understand debugging information in whatever format is the standard
6513 generated for that environment; you may use either a GNU compiler, or
6514 other compilers that adhere to the local conventions. Best results are
6515 usually obtained from GNU compilers; for example, using @code{@value{GCC}}
6516 you can generate debugging information for optimized code.
6517
6518 On some kinds of object files, the @code{symbol-file} command does not
6519 normally read the symbol table in full right away. Instead, it scans
6520 the symbol table quickly to find which source files and which symbols
6521 are present. The details are read later, one source file at a time,
6522 as they are needed.
6523
6524 The purpose of this two-stage reading strategy is to make @value{GDBN} start up
6525 faster. For the most part, it is invisible except for occasional
6526 pauses while the symbol table details for a particular source file are
6527 being read. (The @code{set verbose} command can turn these pauses
6528 into messages if desired. @xref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings
6529 and messages}.)
6530
6531 We have not implemented the two-stage strategy for COFF yet. When the
6532 symbol table is stored in COFF format, @code{symbol-file} reads the
6533 symbol table data in full right away.
6534
6535 @item symbol-file @var{filename} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6536 @itemx file @var{filename} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6537 @kindex readnow
6538 @cindex reading symbols immediately
6539 @cindex symbols, reading immediately
6540 @kindex mapped
6541 @cindex memory-mapped symbol file
6542 @cindex saving symbol table
6543 You can override the @value{GDBN} two-stage strategy for reading symbol
6544 tables by using the @samp{-readnow} option with any of the commands that
6545 load symbol table information, if you want to be sure @value{GDBN} has the
6546 entire symbol table available.
6547
6548 @ifclear BARETARGET
6549 If memory-mapped files are available on your system through the
6550 @code{mmap} system call, you can use another option, @samp{-mapped}, to
6551 cause @value{GDBN} to write the symbols for your program into a reusable
6552 file. Future @value{GDBN} debugging sessions will map in symbol information
6553 from this auxiliary symbol file (if the program has not changed), rather
6554 than spending time reading the symbol table from the executable
6555 program. Using the @samp{-mapped} option has the same effect as
6556 starting @value{GDBN} with the @samp{-mapped} command-line option.
6557
6558 You can use both options together, to make sure the auxiliary symbol
6559 file has all the symbol information for your program.
6560
6561 The auxiliary symbol file for a program called @var{myprog} is called
6562 @samp{@var{myprog}.syms}. Once this file exists (so long as it is newer
6563 than the corresponding executable), @value{GDBN} will always attempt to use
6564 it when you debug @var{myprog}; no special options or commands are
6565 needed.
6566
6567 The @file{.syms} file is specific to the host machine where you run
6568 @value{GDBN}. It holds an exact image of the internal @value{GDBN}
6569 symbol table. It cannot be shared across multiple host platforms.
6570
6571 @c FIXME: for now no mention of directories, since this seems to be in
6572 @c flux. 13mar1992 status is that in theory GDB would look either in
6573 @c current dir or in same dir as myprog; but issues like competing
6574 @c GDB's, or clutter in system dirs, mean that in practice right now
6575 @c only current dir is used. FFish says maybe a special GDB hierarchy
6576 @c (eg rooted in val of env var GDBSYMS) could exist for mappable symbol
6577 @c files.
6578
6579 @item core-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6580 @kindex core
6581 @kindex core-file
6582 Specify the whereabouts of a core dump file to be used as the ``contents
6583 of memory''. Traditionally, core files contain only some parts of the
6584 address space of the process that generated them; @value{GDBN} can access the
6585 executable file itself for other parts.
6586
6587 @code{core-file} with no argument specifies that no core file is
6588 to be used.
6589
6590 Note that the core file is ignored when your program is actually running
6591 under @value{GDBN}. So, if you have been running your program and you wish to
6592 debug a core file instead, you must kill the subprocess in which the
6593 program is running. To do this, use the @code{kill} command
6594 (@pxref{Kill Process, ,Killing the child process}).
6595 @end ifclear
6596
6597 @item load @var{filename}
6598 @kindex load
6599 @ifset GENERIC
6600 Depending on what remote debugging facilities are configured into
6601 @value{GDBN}, the @code{load} command may be available. Where it exists, it
6602 is meant to make @var{filename} (an executable) available for debugging
6603 on the remote system---by downloading, or dynamic linking, for example.
6604 @code{load} also records the @var{filename} symbol table in @value{GDBN}, like
6605 the @code{add-symbol-file} command.
6606
6607 If your @value{GDBN} does not have a @code{load} command, attempting to
6608 execute it gets the error message ``@code{You can't do that when your
6609 target is @dots{}}''
6610 @end ifset
6611
6612 @ifset VXWORKS
6613 On VxWorks, @code{load} will dynamically link @var{filename} on the
6614 current target system as well as adding its symbols in @value{GDBN}.
6615 @end ifset
6616
6617 @ifset I960
6618 @cindex download to Nindy-960
6619 With the Nindy interface to an Intel 960 board, @code{load} will
6620 download @var{filename} to the 960 as well as adding its symbols in
6621 @value{GDBN}.
6622 @end ifset
6623
6624 @ifset H8
6625 @cindex download to H8/300 or H8/500
6626 @cindex H8/300 or H8/500 download
6627 @c start-sanitize-Hitachi-SH
6628 @cindex download to Hitachi SH
6629 @cindex Hitachi SH download
6630 @c end-sanitize-Hitachi-SH
6631 When you select remote debugging to a Hitachi
6632 @c start-sanitize-Hitachi-SH
6633 SH,
6634 @c end-sanitize-Hitachi-SH
6635 H8/300, or H8/500 board
6636 (@pxref{Hitachi Remote,,@value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors}),
6637 the @code{load} command downloads your program to the Hitachi board and also
6638 opens it as the current executable target for @value{GDBN} on your host
6639 (like the @code{file} command).
6640 @end ifset
6641
6642 @code{load} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after using it.
6643
6644 @ifclear BARETARGET
6645 @item add-symbol-file @var{filename} @var{address}
6646 @itemx add-symbol-file @var{filename} @var{address} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6647 @kindex add-symbol-file
6648 @cindex dynamic linking
6649 The @code{add-symbol-file} command reads additional symbol table information
6650 from the file @var{filename}. You would use this command when @var{filename}
6651 has been dynamically loaded (by some other means) into the program that
6652 is running. @var{address} should be the memory address at which the
6653 file has been loaded; @value{GDBN} cannot figure this out for itself.
6654 You can specify @var{address} as an expression.
6655
6656 The symbol table of the file @var{filename} is added to the symbol table
6657 originally read with the @code{symbol-file} command. You can use the
6658 @code{add-symbol-file} command any number of times; the new symbol data thus
6659 read keeps adding to the old. To discard all old symbol data instead,
6660 use the @code{symbol-file} command.
6661
6662 @code{add-symbol-file} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} after using it.
6663
6664 You can use the @samp{-mapped} and @samp{-readnow} options just as with
6665 the @code{symbol-file} command, to change how @value{GDBN} manages the symbol
6666 table information for @var{filename}.
6667 @end ifclear
6668
6669 @item info files
6670 @itemx info target
6671 @kindex info files
6672 @kindex info target
6673 @code{info files} and @code{info target} are synonymous; both print
6674 the current target (@pxref{Targets, ,Specifying a Debugging Target}),
6675 including the
6676 @ifclear BARETARGET
6677 names of the executable and core dump files
6678 @end ifclear
6679 @ifset BARETARGET
6680 name of the executable file
6681 @end ifset
6682 currently in use by @value{GDBN}, and the files from which symbols were
6683 loaded. The command @code{help targets} lists all possible targets
6684 rather than current ones.
6685 @end table
6686
6687 All file-specifying commands allow both absolute and relative file names
6688 as arguments. @value{GDBN} always converts the file name to an absolute path
6689 name and remembers it that way.
6690
6691 @ifclear BARETARGET
6692 @cindex shared libraries
6693 @value{GDBN} supports SunOS, SVR4, and IBM RS/6000 shared libraries.
6694 @value{GDBN} automatically loads symbol definitions from shared libraries
6695 when you use the @code{run} command, or when you examine a core file.
6696 (Before you issue the @code{run} command, @value{GDBN} will not understand
6697 references to a function in a shared library, however---unless you are
6698 debugging a core file).
6699 @c FIXME: next @value{GDBN} release should permit some refs to undef
6700 @c FIXME...symbols---eg in a break cmd---assuming they are from a shared lib
6701
6702 @table @code
6703 @item info share
6704 @itemx info sharedlibrary
6705 @kindex info sharedlibrary
6706 @kindex info share
6707 Print the names of the shared libraries which are currently loaded.
6708
6709 @item sharedlibrary @var{regex}
6710 @itemx share @var{regex}
6711 @kindex sharedlibrary
6712 @kindex share
6713 This is an obsolescent command; you can use it to explicitly
6714 load shared object library symbols for files matching a UNIX regular
6715 expression, but as with files loaded automatically, it will only load
6716 shared libraries required by your program for a core file or after
6717 typing @code{run}. If @var{regex} is omitted all shared libraries
6718 required by your program are loaded.
6719 @end table
6720 @end ifclear
6721
6722 @node Symbol Errors
6723 @section Errors reading symbol files
6724
6725 While reading a symbol file, @value{GDBN} will occasionally encounter problems,
6726 such as symbol types it does not recognize, or known bugs in compiler
6727 output. By default, @value{GDBN} does not notify you of such problems, since
6728 they are relatively common and primarily of interest to people
6729 debugging compilers. If you are interested in seeing information
6730 about ill-constructed symbol tables, you can either ask @value{GDBN} to print
6731 only one message about each such type of problem, no matter how many
6732 times the problem occurs; or you can ask @value{GDBN} to print more messages,
6733 to see how many times the problems occur, with the @code{set
6734 complaints} command (@pxref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and
6735 messages}).
6736
6737 The messages currently printed, and their meanings, include:
6738
6739 @table @code
6740 @item inner block not inside outer block in @var{symbol}
6741
6742 The symbol information shows where symbol scopes begin and end
6743 (such as at the start of a function or a block of statements). This
6744 error indicates that an inner scope block is not fully contained
6745 in its outer scope blocks.
6746
6747 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by treating the inner block as if it had
6748 the same scope as the outer block. In the error message, @var{symbol}
6749 may be shown as ``@code{(don't know)}'' if the outer block is not a
6750 function.
6751
6752 @item block at @var{address} out of order
6753
6754 The symbol information for symbol scope blocks should occur in
6755 order of increasing addresses. This error indicates that it does not
6756 do so.
6757
6758 @value{GDBN} does not circumvent this problem, and will have trouble
6759 locating symbols in the source file whose symbols it is reading. (You
6760 can often determine what source file is affected by specifying
6761 @code{set verbose on}. @xref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and
6762 messages}.)
6763
6764 @item bad block start address patched
6765
6766 The symbol information for a symbol scope block has a start address
6767 smaller than the address of the preceding source line. This is known
6768 to occur in the SunOS 4.1.1 (and earlier) C compiler.
6769
6770 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by treating the symbol scope block as
6771 starting on the previous source line.
6772
6773 @item bad string table offset in symbol @var{n}
6774
6775 @cindex foo
6776 Symbol number @var{n} contains a pointer into the string table which is
6777 larger than the size of the string table.
6778
6779 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by considering the symbol to have the
6780 name @code{foo}, which may cause other problems if many symbols end up
6781 with this name.
6782
6783 @item unknown symbol type @code{0x@var{nn}}
6784
6785 The symbol information contains new data types that @value{GDBN} does not yet
6786 know how to read. @code{0x@var{nn}} is the symbol type of the misunderstood
6787 information, in hexadecimal.
6788
6789 @value{GDBN} circumvents the error by ignoring this symbol information. This
6790 will usually allow your program to be debugged, though certain symbols
6791 will not be accessible. If you encounter such a problem and feel like
6792 debugging it, you can debug @code{@value{GDBP}} with itself, breakpoint on
6793 @code{complain}, then go up to the function @code{read_dbx_symtab} and
6794 examine @code{*bufp} to see the symbol.
6795
6796 @item stub type has NULL name
6797 @value{GDBN} could not find the full definition for
6798 @ifclear CONLY
6799 a struct or class.
6800 @end ifclear
6801 @ifset CONLY
6802 a struct.
6803 @end ifset
6804
6805 @ifclear CONLY
6806 @item const/volatile indicator missing (ok if using g++ v1.x), got@dots{}
6807
6808 The symbol information for a C++ member function is missing some
6809 information that recent versions of the compiler should have output
6810 for it.
6811 @end ifclear
6812
6813 @item info mismatch between compiler and debugger
6814
6815 @value{GDBN} could not parse a type specification output by the compiler.
6816 @end table
6817
6818 @node Targets
6819 @chapter Specifying a Debugging Target
6820 @cindex debugging target
6821 @kindex target
6822
6823 A @dfn{target} is the execution environment occupied by your program.
6824 @ifclear BARETARGET
6825 Often, @value{GDBN} runs in the same host environment as your program; in
6826 that case, the debugging target is specified as a side effect when you
6827 use the @code{file} or @code{core} commands. When you need more
6828 flexibility---for example, running @value{GDBN} on a physically separate
6829 host, or controlling a standalone system over a serial port or a
6830 realtime system over a TCP/IP connection---you
6831 @end ifclear
6832 @ifset BARETARGET
6833 You
6834 @end ifset
6835 can use the @code{target} command to specify one of the target types
6836 configured for @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Target Commands, ,Commands for managing
6837 targets}).
6838
6839 @menu
6840 * Active Targets:: Active targets
6841 * Target Commands:: Commands for managing targets
6842 * Remote:: Remote debugging
6843 @end menu
6844
6845 @node Active Targets
6846 @section Active targets
6847 @cindex stacking targets
6848 @cindex active targets
6849 @cindex multiple targets
6850
6851 @ifclear BARETARGET
6852 There are three classes of targets: processes, core files, and
6853 executable files. @value{GDBN} can work concurrently on up to three active
6854 targets, one in each class. This allows you to (for example) start a
6855 process and inspect its activity without abandoning your work on a core
6856 file.
6857
6858 For example, if you execute @samp{gdb a.out}, then the executable file
6859 @code{a.out} is the only active target. If you designate a core file as
6860 well---presumably from a prior run that crashed and coredumped---then
6861 @value{GDBN} has two active targets and will use them in tandem, looking
6862 first in the corefile target, then in the executable file, to satisfy
6863 requests for memory addresses. (Typically, these two classes of target
6864 are complementary, since core files contain only a program's
6865 read-write memory---variables and so on---plus machine status, while
6866 executable files contain only the program text and initialized data.)
6867 @end ifclear
6868
6869 When you type @code{run}, your executable file becomes an active process
6870 target as well. When a process target is active, all @value{GDBN} commands
6871 requesting memory addresses refer to that target; addresses in an
6872 @ifclear BARETARGET
6873 active core file or
6874 @end ifclear
6875 executable file target are obscured while the process
6876 target is active.
6877
6878 @ifset BARETARGET
6879 Use the @code{exec-file} command to select a
6880 new executable target (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify
6881 files}).
6882 @end ifset
6883 @ifclear BARETARGET
6884 Use the @code{core-file} and @code{exec-file} commands to select a
6885 new core file or executable target (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify
6886 files}). To specify as a target a process that is already running, use
6887 the @code{attach} command (@pxref{Attach, ,Debugging an
6888 already-running process}).
6889 @end ifclear
6890
6891 @node Target Commands
6892 @section Commands for managing targets
6893
6894 @table @code
6895 @item target @var{type} @var{parameters}
6896 Connects the @value{GDBN} host environment to a target
6897 @ifset BARETARGET
6898 machine.
6899 @end ifset
6900 @ifclear BARETARGET
6901 machine or process. A target is typically a protocol for talking to
6902 debugging facilities. You use the argument @var{type} to specify the
6903 type or protocol of the target machine.
6904
6905 Further @var{parameters} are interpreted by the target protocol, but
6906 typically include things like device names or host names to connect
6907 with, process numbers, and baud rates.
6908 @end ifclear
6909
6910 The @code{target} command will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again
6911 after executing the command.
6912
6913 @item help target
6914 @kindex help target
6915 Displays the names of all targets available. To display targets
6916 currently selected, use either @code{info target} or @code{info files}
6917 (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
6918
6919 @item help target @var{name}
6920 Describe a particular target, including any parameters necessary to
6921 select it.
6922 @end table
6923
6924 Here are some common targets (available, or not, depending on the GDB
6925 configuration):
6926
6927 @table @code
6928 @item target exec @var{program}
6929 @kindex target exec
6930 An executable file. @samp{target exec @var{program}} is the same as
6931 @samp{exec-file @var{program}}.
6932
6933 @ifclear BARETARGET
6934 @item target core @var{filename}
6935 @kindex target core
6936 A core dump file. @samp{target core @var{filename}} is the same as
6937 @samp{core-file @var{filename}}.
6938 @end ifclear
6939
6940 @ifset REMOTESTUB
6941 @item target remote @var{dev}
6942 @kindex target remote
6943 Remote serial target in GDB-specific protocol. The argument @var{dev}
6944 specifies what serial device to use for the connection (e.g.
6945 @file{/dev/ttya}). @xref{Remote, ,Remote debugging}.
6946 @end ifset
6947
6948 @ifset SIMS
6949 @item target sim
6950 @kindex target sim
6951 CPU simulator. @xref{Simulator,,Simulated CPU Target}.
6952 @end ifset
6953
6954 @ifset AMD29K
6955 @item target udi @var{keyword}
6956 @kindex target udi
6957 Remote AMD29K target, using the AMD UDI protocol. The @var{keyword}
6958 argument specifies which 29K board or simulator to use. @xref{UDI29K
6959 Remote,,@value{GDBN} and the UDI protocol for AMD29K}.
6960
6961 @item target amd-eb @var{dev} @var{speed} @var{PROG}
6962 @kindex target amd-eb
6963 @cindex AMD EB29K
6964 Remote PC-resident AMD EB29K board, attached over serial lines.
6965 @var{dev} is the serial device, as for @code{target remote};
6966 @var{speed} allows you to specify the linespeed; and @var{PROG} is the
6967 name of the program to be debugged, as it appears to DOS on the PC.
6968 @xref{EB29K Remote, ,@value{GDBN} with a remote EB29K}.
6969
6970 @end ifset
6971 @ifset H8
6972 @item target hms
6973 @kindex target hms
6974 A Hitachi
6975 @c start-sanitize-Hitachi-SH
6976 SH,
6977 @c end-sanitize-Hitachi-SH
6978 H8/300, or H8/500 board, attached via serial line to your host.
6979 @ifclear H8EXCLUSIVE
6980 @c Unix only, not currently of interest for H8-only manual
6981 Use special commands @code{device} and @code{speed} to control the serial
6982 line and the communications speed used.
6983 @end ifclear
6984 @xref{Hitachi Remote,,@value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors}.
6985
6986 @end ifset
6987 @ifset I960
6988 @item target nindy @var{devicename}
6989 @kindex target nindy
6990 An Intel 960 board controlled by a Nindy Monitor. @var{devicename} is
6991 the name of the serial device to use for the connection, e.g.
6992 @file{/dev/ttya}. @xref{i960-Nindy Remote, ,@value{GDBN} with a remote i960 (Nindy)}.
6993
6994 @end ifset
6995 @ifset ST2000
6996 @item target st2000 @var{dev} @var{speed}
6997 @kindex target st2000
6998 A Tandem ST2000 phone switch, running Tandem's STDBUG protocol. @var{dev}
6999 is the name of the device attached to the ST2000 serial line;
7000 @var{speed} is the communication line speed. The arguments are not used
7001 if @value{GDBN} is configured to connect to the ST2000 using TCP or Telnet.
7002 @xref{ST2000 Remote,,@value{GDBN} with a Tandem ST2000}.
7003
7004 @end ifset
7005 @ifset VXWORKS
7006 @item target vxworks @var{machinename}
7007 @kindex target vxworks
7008 A VxWorks system, attached via TCP/IP. The argument @var{machinename}
7009 is the target system's machine name or IP address.
7010 @xref{VxWorks Remote, ,@value{GDBN} and VxWorks}.
7011 @end ifset
7012 @end table
7013
7014 @ifset GENERIC
7015 Different targets are available on different configurations of @value{GDBN}; your
7016 configuration may have more or fewer targets.
7017 @end ifset
7018
7019 @node Remote
7020 @section Remote debugging
7021 @cindex remote debugging
7022
7023 If you are trying to debug a program running on a machine that cannot run
7024 GDB in the usual way, it is often useful to use remote debugging. For
7025 example, you might use remote debugging on an operating system kernel, or on
7026 a small system which does not have a general purpose operating system
7027 powerful enough to run a full-featured debugger.
7028
7029 Some configurations of GDB have special serial or TCP/IP interfaces
7030 to make this work with particular debugging targets. In addition,
7031 GDB comes with a generic serial protocol (specific to GDB, but
7032 not specific to any particular target system) which you can use if you
7033 write the remote stubs---the code that will run on the remote system to
7034 communicate with GDB.
7035
7036 Other remote targets may be available in your
7037 configuration of GDB; use @code{help targets} to list them.
7038
7039 @ifset GENERIC
7040 @c Text on starting up GDB in various specific cases; it goes up front
7041 @c in manuals configured for any of those particular situations, here
7042 @c otherwise.
7043 @menu
7044 @ifset REMOTESTUB
7045 * Remote Serial:: @value{GDBN} remote serial protocol
7046 @end ifset
7047 @ifset I960
7048 * i960-Nindy Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a remote i960 (Nindy)
7049 @end ifset
7050 @ifset AMD29K
7051 * UDI29K Remote:: @value{GDBN} and the UDI protocol for AMD29K
7052 * EB29K Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a remote EB29K
7053 @end ifset
7054 @ifset VXWORKS
7055 * VxWorks Remote:: @value{GDBN} and VxWorks
7056 @end ifset
7057 @ifset ST2000
7058 * ST2000 Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a Tandem ST2000
7059 @end ifset
7060 @ifset H8
7061 * Hitachi Remote:: @value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors
7062 @end ifset
7063 @ifset MIPS
7064 * MIPS Remote:: @value{GDBN} and MIPS boards
7065 @end ifset
7066 @ifset SIMS
7067 * Simulator:: Simulated CPU target
7068 @end ifset
7069 @end menu
7070
7071 @include remote.texi
7072 @end ifset
7073
7074 @node Controlling GDB
7075 @chapter Controlling @value{GDBN}
7076
7077 You can alter the way @value{GDBN} interacts with you by using
7078 the @code{set} command. For commands controlling how @value{GDBN} displays
7079 data, @pxref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}; other settings are described here.
7080
7081 @menu
7082 * Prompt:: Prompt
7083 * Editing:: Command editing
7084 * History:: Command history
7085 * Screen Size:: Screen size
7086 * Numbers:: Numbers
7087 * Messages/Warnings:: Optional warnings and messages
7088 @end menu
7089
7090 @node Prompt
7091 @section Prompt
7092 @cindex prompt
7093
7094 @value{GDBN} indicates its readiness to read a command by printing a string
7095 called the @dfn{prompt}. This string is normally @samp{(@value{GDBP})}. You
7096 can change the prompt string with the @code{set prompt} command. For
7097 instance, when debugging @value{GDBN} with @value{GDBN}, it is useful to change
7098 the prompt in one of the @value{GDBN} sessions so that you can always tell which
7099 one you are talking to.
7100
7101 @table @code
7102 @item set prompt @var{newprompt}
7103 @kindex set prompt
7104 Directs @value{GDBN} to use @var{newprompt} as its prompt string henceforth.
7105 @kindex show prompt
7106 @item show prompt
7107 Prints a line of the form: @samp{Gdb's prompt is: @var{your-prompt}}
7108 @end table
7109
7110 @node Editing
7111 @section Command editing
7112 @cindex readline
7113 @cindex command line editing
7114
7115 @value{GDBN} reads its input commands via the @dfn{readline} interface. This
7116 GNU library provides consistent behavior for programs which provide a
7117 command line interface to the user. Advantages are @code{emacs}-style
7118 or @code{vi}-style inline editing of commands, @code{csh}-like history
7119 substitution, and a storage and recall of command history across
7120 debugging sessions.
7121
7122 You may control the behavior of command line editing in @value{GDBN} with the
7123 command @code{set}.
7124
7125 @table @code
7126 @kindex set editing
7127 @cindex editing
7128 @item set editing
7129 @itemx set editing on
7130 Enable command line editing (enabled by default).
7131
7132 @item set editing off
7133 Disable command line editing.
7134
7135 @kindex show editing
7136 @item show editing
7137 Show whether command line editing is enabled.
7138 @end table
7139
7140 @node History
7141 @section Command history
7142
7143 @value{GDBN} can keep track of the commands you type during your
7144 debugging sessions, so that you can be certain of precisely what
7145 happened. Use these commands to manage the @value{GDBN} command
7146 history facility.
7147
7148 @table @code
7149 @cindex history substitution
7150 @cindex history file
7151 @kindex set history filename
7152 @item set history filename @var{fname}
7153 Set the name of the @value{GDBN} command history file to @var{fname}. This is
7154 the file from which @value{GDBN} will read an initial command history
7155 list or to which it will write this list when it exits. This list is
7156 accessed through history expansion or through the history
7157 command editing characters listed below. This file defaults to the
7158 value of the environment variable @code{GDBHISTFILE}, or to
7159 @file{./.gdb_history} if this variable is not set.
7160
7161 @cindex history save
7162 @kindex set history save
7163 @item set history save
7164 @itemx set history save on
7165 Record command history in a file, whose name may be specified with the
7166 @code{set history filename} command. By default, this option is disabled.
7167
7168 @item set history save off
7169 Stop recording command history in a file.
7170
7171 @cindex history size
7172 @kindex set history size
7173 @item set history size @var{size}
7174 Set the number of commands which @value{GDBN} will keep in its history list.
7175 This defaults to the value of the environment variable
7176 @code{HISTSIZE}, or to 256 if this variable is not set.
7177 @end table
7178
7179 @cindex history expansion
7180 History expansion assigns special meaning to the character @kbd{!}.
7181 @ifset have-readline-appendices
7182 @xref{Event Designators}.
7183 @end ifset
7184
7185 Since @kbd{!} is also the logical not operator in C, history expansion
7186 is off by default. If you decide to enable history expansion with the
7187 @code{set history expansion on} command, you may sometimes need to
7188 follow @kbd{!} (when it is used as logical not, in an expression) with
7189 a space or a tab to prevent it from being expanded. The readline
7190 history facilities will not attempt substitution on the strings
7191 @kbd{!=} and @kbd{!(}, even when history expansion is enabled.
7192
7193 The commands to control history expansion are:
7194
7195 @table @code
7196
7197 @kindex set history expansion
7198 @item set history expansion on
7199 @itemx set history expansion
7200 Enable history expansion. History expansion is off by default.
7201
7202 @item set history expansion off
7203 Disable history expansion.
7204
7205 The readline code comes with more complete documentation of
7206 editing and history expansion features. Users unfamiliar with @code{emacs}
7207 or @code{vi} may wish to read it.
7208 @ifset have-readline-appendices
7209 @xref{Command Line Editing}.
7210 @end ifset
7211
7212 @c @group
7213 @kindex show history
7214 @item show history
7215 @itemx show history filename
7216 @itemx show history save
7217 @itemx show history size
7218 @itemx show history expansion
7219 These commands display the state of the @value{GDBN} history parameters.
7220 @code{show history} by itself displays all four states.
7221 @c @end group
7222 @end table
7223
7224 @table @code
7225 @kindex show commands
7226 @item show commands
7227 Display the last ten commands in the command history.
7228
7229 @item show commands @var{n}
7230 Print ten commands centered on command number @var{n}.
7231
7232 @item show commands +
7233 Print ten commands just after the commands last printed.
7234 @end table
7235
7236 @node Screen Size
7237 @section Screen size
7238 @cindex size of screen
7239 @cindex pauses in output
7240
7241 Certain commands to @value{GDBN} may produce large amounts of
7242 information output to the screen. To help you read all of it,
7243 @value{GDBN} pauses and asks you for input at the end of each page of
7244 output. Type @key{RET} when you want to continue the output, or @kbd{q}
7245 to discard the remaining output. Also, the screen width setting
7246 determines when to wrap lines of output. Depending on what is being
7247 printed, @value{GDBN} tries to break the line at a readable place,
7248 rather than simply letting it overflow onto the following line.
7249
7250 Normally @value{GDBN} knows the size of the screen from the termcap data base
7251 together with the value of the @code{TERM} environment variable and the
7252 @code{stty rows} and @code{stty cols} settings. If this is not correct,
7253 you can override it with the @code{set height} and @code{set
7254 width} commands:
7255
7256 @table @code
7257 @item set height @var{lpp}
7258 @itemx show height
7259 @itemx set width @var{cpl}
7260 @itemx show width
7261 @kindex set height
7262 @kindex set width
7263 @kindex show width
7264 @kindex show height
7265 These @code{set} commands specify a screen height of @var{lpp} lines and
7266 a screen width of @var{cpl} characters. The associated @code{show}
7267 commands display the current settings.
7268
7269 If you specify a height of zero lines, @value{GDBN} will not pause during output
7270 no matter how long the output is. This is useful if output is to a file
7271 or to an editor buffer.
7272
7273 Likewise, you can specify @samp{set width 0} to prevent @value{GDBN}
7274 from wrapping its output.
7275 @end table
7276
7277 @node Numbers
7278 @section Numbers
7279 @cindex number representation
7280 @cindex entering numbers
7281
7282 You can always enter numbers in octal, decimal, or hexadecimal in @value{GDBN} by
7283 the usual conventions: octal numbers begin with @samp{0}, decimal
7284 numbers end with @samp{.}, and hexadecimal numbers begin with @samp{0x}.
7285 Numbers that begin with none of these are, by default, entered in base
7286 10; likewise, the default display for numbers---when no particular
7287 format is specified---is base 10. You can change the default base for
7288 both input and output with the @code{set radix} command.
7289
7290 @table @code
7291 @kindex set radix
7292 @item set radix @var{base}
7293 Set the default base for numeric input and display. Supported choices
7294 for @var{base} are decimal 8, 10, or 16. @var{base} must itself be
7295 specified either unambiguously or using the current default radix; for
7296 example, any of
7297
7298 @example
7299 set radix 012
7300 set radix 10.
7301 set radix 0xa
7302 @end example
7303
7304 @noindent
7305 will set the base to decimal. On the other hand, @samp{set radix 10}
7306 will leave the radix unchanged no matter what it was.
7307
7308 @kindex show radix
7309 @item show radix
7310 Display the current default base for numeric input and display.
7311 @end table
7312
7313 @node Messages/Warnings
7314 @section Optional warnings and messages
7315
7316 By default, @value{GDBN} is silent about its inner workings. If you are running
7317 on a slow machine, you may want to use the @code{set verbose} command.
7318 It will make @value{GDBN} tell you when it does a lengthy internal operation, so
7319 you will not think it has crashed.
7320
7321 Currently, the messages controlled by @code{set verbose} are those
7322 which announce that the symbol table for a source file is being read;
7323 see @code{symbol-file} in @ref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}.
7324
7325 @table @code
7326 @kindex set verbose
7327 @item set verbose on
7328 Enables @value{GDBN} output of certain informational messages.
7329
7330 @item set verbose off
7331 Disables @value{GDBN} output of certain informational messages.
7332
7333 @kindex show verbose
7334 @item show verbose
7335 Displays whether @code{set verbose} is on or off.
7336 @end table
7337
7338 By default, if @value{GDBN} encounters bugs in the symbol table of an object
7339 file, it is silent; but if you are debugging a compiler, you may find
7340 this information useful (@pxref{Symbol Errors, ,Errors reading symbol files}).
7341
7342 @table @code
7343 @kindex set complaints
7344 @item set complaints @var{limit}
7345 Permits @value{GDBN} to output @var{limit} complaints about each type of unusual
7346 symbols before becoming silent about the problem. Set @var{limit} to
7347 zero to suppress all complaints; set it to a large number to prevent
7348 complaints from being suppressed.
7349
7350 @kindex show complaints
7351 @item show complaints
7352 Displays how many symbol complaints @value{GDBN} is permitted to produce.
7353 @end table
7354
7355 By default, @value{GDBN} is cautious, and asks what sometimes seems to be a
7356 lot of stupid questions to confirm certain commands. For example, if
7357 you try to run a program which is already running:
7358
7359 @example
7360 (@value{GDBP}) run
7361 The program being debugged has been started already.
7362 Start it from the beginning? (y or n)
7363 @end example
7364
7365 If you are willing to unflinchingly face the consequences of your own
7366 commands, you can disable this ``feature'':
7367
7368 @table @code
7369 @kindex set confirm
7370 @cindex flinching
7371 @cindex confirmation
7372 @cindex stupid questions
7373 @item set confirm off
7374 Disables confirmation requests.
7375
7376 @item set confirm on
7377 Enables confirmation requests (the default).
7378
7379 @item show confirm
7380 @kindex show confirm
7381 Displays state of confirmation requests.
7382 @end table
7383
7384 @c FIXME this does not really belong here. But where *does* it belong?
7385 @cindex reloading symbols
7386 Some systems allow individual object files that make up your program to
7387 be replaced without stopping and restarting your program.
7388 @ifset VXWORKS
7389 For example, in VxWorks you can simply recompile a defective object file
7390 and keep on running.
7391 @end ifset
7392 If you are running on one of these systems, you can allow @value{GDBN} to
7393 reload the symbols for automatically relinked modules:
7394
7395 @table @code
7396 @kindex set symbol-reloading
7397 @item set symbol-reloading on
7398 Replace symbol definitions for the corresponding source file when an
7399 object file with a particular name is seen again.
7400
7401 @item set symbol-reloading off
7402 Do not replace symbol definitions when re-encountering object files of
7403 the same name. This is the default state; if you are not running on a
7404 system that permits automatically relinking modules, you should leave
7405 @code{symbol-reloading} off, since otherwise @value{GDBN} may discard symbols
7406 when linking large programs, that may contain several modules (from
7407 different directories or libraries) with the same name.
7408
7409 @item show symbol-reloading
7410 Show the current @code{on} or @code{off} setting.
7411 @end table
7412
7413 @node Sequences
7414 @chapter Canned Sequences of Commands
7415
7416 Aside from breakpoint commands (@pxref{Break Commands, ,Breakpoint
7417 command lists}), @value{GDBN} provides two ways to store sequences of commands
7418 for execution as a unit: user-defined commands and command files.
7419
7420 @menu
7421 * Define:: User-defined commands
7422 * Hooks:: User-defined command hooks
7423 * Command Files:: Command files
7424 * Output:: Commands for controlled output
7425 @end menu
7426
7427 @node Define
7428 @section User-defined commands
7429
7430 @cindex user-defined command
7431 A @dfn{user-defined command} is a sequence of @value{GDBN} commands to which you
7432 assign a new name as a command. This is done with the @code{define}
7433 command.
7434
7435 @table @code
7436 @item define @var{commandname}
7437 @kindex define
7438 Define a command named @var{commandname}. If there is already a command
7439 by that name, you are asked to confirm that you want to redefine it.
7440
7441 The definition of the command is made up of other @value{GDBN} command lines,
7442 which are given following the @code{define} command. The end of these
7443 commands is marked by a line containing @code{end}.
7444
7445 @item document @var{commandname}
7446 @kindex document
7447 Give documentation to the user-defined command @var{commandname}. The
7448 command @var{commandname} must already be defined. This command reads
7449 lines of documentation just as @code{define} reads the lines of the
7450 command definition, ending with @code{end}. After the @code{document}
7451 command is finished, @code{help} on command @var{commandname} will print
7452 the documentation you have specified.
7453
7454 You may use the @code{document} command again to change the
7455 documentation of a command. Redefining the command with @code{define}
7456 does not change the documentation.
7457
7458 @item help user-defined
7459 @kindex help user-defined
7460 List all user-defined commands, with the first line of the documentation
7461 (if any) for each.
7462
7463 @item show user
7464 @itemx show user @var{commandname}
7465 @kindex show user
7466 Display the @value{GDBN} commands used to define @var{commandname} (but not its
7467 documentation). If no @var{commandname} is given, display the
7468 definitions for all user-defined commands.
7469 @end table
7470
7471 User-defined commands do not take arguments. When they are executed, the
7472 commands of the definition are not printed. An error in any command
7473 stops execution of the user-defined command.
7474
7475 Commands that would ask for confirmation if used interactively proceed
7476 without asking when used inside a user-defined command. Many @value{GDBN} commands
7477 that normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the messages
7478 when used in a user-defined command.
7479
7480 @node Hooks
7481 @section User-defined command hooks
7482 @cindex command files
7483
7484 You may define @emph{hooks}, which are a special kind of user-defined
7485 command. Whenever you run the command @samp{foo}, if the user-defined
7486 command @samp{hook-foo} exists, it is executed (with no arguments)
7487 before that command.
7488
7489 In addition, a pseudo-command, @samp{stop} exists. Defining
7490 (@samp{hook-stop}) makes the associated commands execute every time
7491 execution stops in your program: before breakpoint commands are run,
7492 displays are printed, or the stack frame is printed.
7493
7494 @ifclear BARETARGET
7495 For example, to ignore @code{SIGALRM} signals while
7496 single-stepping, but treat them normally during normal execution,
7497 you could define:
7498
7499 @example
7500 define hook-stop
7501 handle SIGALRM nopass
7502 end
7503
7504 define hook-run
7505 handle SIGALRM pass
7506 end
7507
7508 define hook-continue
7509 handle SIGLARM pass
7510 end
7511 @end example
7512 @end ifclear
7513
7514 You can define a hook for any single-word command in @value{GDBN}, but
7515 not for command aliases; you should define a hook for the basic command
7516 name, e.g. @code{backtrace} rather than @code{bt}.
7517 @c FIXME! So how does Joe User discover whether a command is an alias
7518 @c or not?
7519 If an error occurs during the execution of your hook, execution of
7520 @value{GDBN} commands stops and @value{GDBN} issues a prompt
7521 (before the command that you actually typed had a chance to run).
7522
7523 If you try to define a hook which does not match any known command, you
7524 will get a warning from the @code{define} command.
7525
7526 @node Command Files
7527 @section Command files
7528
7529 @cindex command files
7530 A command file for @value{GDBN} is a file of lines that are @value{GDBN} commands. Comments
7531 (lines starting with @kbd{#}) may also be included. An empty line in a
7532 command file does nothing; it does not mean to repeat the last command, as
7533 it would from the terminal.
7534
7535 @cindex init file
7536 @cindex @file{@value{GDBINIT}}
7537 When you start @value{GDBN}, it automatically executes commands from its
7538 @dfn{init files}. These are files named @file{@value{GDBINIT}}. @value{GDBN} reads
7539 the init file (if any) in your home directory and then the init file
7540 (if any) in the current working directory. (The init files are not
7541 executed if you use the @samp{-nx} option; @pxref{Mode Options,
7542 ,Choosing modes}.)
7543
7544 @ifset GENERIC
7545 @cindex init file name
7546 On some configurations of @value{GDBN}, the init file is known by a
7547 different name (these are typically environments where a specialized
7548 form of GDB may need to coexist with other forms, hence a different name
7549 for the specialized version's init file). These are the environments
7550 with special init file names:
7551
7552 @itemize @bullet
7553 @kindex .vxgdbinit
7554 @item
7555 VxWorks (Wind River Systems real-time OS): @samp{.vxgdbinit}
7556
7557 @kindex .os68gdbinit
7558 @item
7559 OS68K (Enea Data Systems real-time OS): @samp{.os68gdbinit}
7560
7561 @kindex .esgdbinit
7562 @item
7563 ES-1800 (Ericsson Telecom AB M68000 emulator): @samp{.esgdbinit}
7564 @end itemize
7565 @end ifset
7566
7567 You can also request the execution of a command file with the
7568 @code{source} command:
7569
7570 @table @code
7571 @item source @var{filename}
7572 @kindex source
7573 Execute the command file @var{filename}.
7574 @end table
7575
7576 The lines in a command file are executed sequentially. They are not
7577 printed as they are executed. An error in any command terminates execution
7578 of the command file.
7579
7580 Commands that would ask for confirmation if used interactively proceed
7581 without asking when used in a command file. Many @value{GDBN} commands that
7582 normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the messages
7583 when called from command files.
7584
7585 @node Output
7586 @section Commands for controlled output
7587
7588 During the execution of a command file or a user-defined command, normal
7589 @value{GDBN} output is suppressed; the only output that appears is what is
7590 explicitly printed by the commands in the definition. This section
7591 describes three commands useful for generating exactly the output you
7592 want.
7593
7594 @table @code
7595 @item echo @var{text}
7596 @kindex echo
7597 @c I do not consider backslash-space a standard C escape sequence
7598 @c because it is not in ANSI.
7599 Print @var{text}. Nonprinting characters can be included in
7600 @var{text} using C escape sequences, such as @samp{\n} to print a
7601 newline. @strong{No newline will be printed unless you specify one.}
7602 In addition to the standard C escape sequences, a backslash followed
7603 by a space stands for a space. This is useful for displaying a
7604 string with spaces at the beginning or the end, since leading and
7605 trailing spaces are otherwise trimmed from all arguments.
7606 To print @samp{@w{ }and foo =@w{ }}, use the command
7607 @samp{echo \@w{ }and foo = \@w{ }}.
7608
7609 A backslash at the end of @var{text} can be used, as in C, to continue
7610 the command onto subsequent lines. For example,
7611
7612 @example
7613 echo This is some text\n\
7614 which is continued\n\
7615 onto several lines.\n
7616 @end example
7617
7618 produces the same output as
7619
7620 @example
7621 echo This is some text\n
7622 echo which is continued\n
7623 echo onto several lines.\n
7624 @end example
7625
7626 @item output @var{expression}
7627 @kindex output
7628 Print the value of @var{expression} and nothing but that value: no
7629 newlines, no @samp{$@var{nn} = }. The value is not entered in the
7630 value history either. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}, for more information on
7631 expressions.
7632
7633 @item output/@var{fmt} @var{expression}
7634 Print the value of @var{expression} in format @var{fmt}. You can use
7635 the same formats as for @code{print}. @xref{Output Formats,,Output
7636 formats}, for more information.
7637
7638 @item printf @var{string}, @var{expressions}@dots{}
7639 @kindex printf
7640 Print the values of the @var{expressions} under the control of
7641 @var{string}. The @var{expressions} are separated by commas and may be
7642 either numbers or pointers. Their values are printed as specified by
7643 @var{string}, exactly as if your program were to execute the C
7644 subroutine
7645
7646 @example
7647 printf (@var{string}, @var{expressions}@dots{});
7648 @end example
7649
7650 For example, you can print two values in hex like this:
7651
7652 @smallexample
7653 printf "foo, bar-foo = 0x%x, 0x%x\n", foo, bar-foo
7654 @end smallexample
7655
7656 The only backslash-escape sequences that you can use in the format
7657 string are the simple ones that consist of backslash followed by a
7658 letter.
7659 @end table
7660
7661 @ifclear DOSHOST
7662 @node Emacs
7663 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} under GNU Emacs
7664
7665 @cindex emacs
7666 A special interface allows you to use GNU Emacs to view (and
7667 edit) the source files for the program you are debugging with
7668 @value{GDBN}.
7669
7670 To use this interface, use the command @kbd{M-x gdb} in Emacs. Give the
7671 executable file you want to debug as an argument. This command starts
7672 @value{GDBN} as a subprocess of Emacs, with input and output through a newly
7673 created Emacs buffer.
7674
7675 Using @value{GDBN} under Emacs is just like using @value{GDBN} normally except for two
7676 things:
7677
7678 @itemize @bullet
7679 @item
7680 All ``terminal'' input and output goes through the Emacs buffer.
7681 @end itemize
7682
7683 This applies both to @value{GDBN} commands and their output, and to the input
7684 and output done by the program you are debugging.
7685
7686 This is useful because it means that you can copy the text of previous
7687 commands and input them again; you can even use parts of the output
7688 in this way.
7689
7690 All the facilities of Emacs' Shell mode are available for interacting
7691 with your program. In particular, you can send signals the usual
7692 way---for example, @kbd{C-c C-c} for an interrupt, @kbd{C-c C-z} for a
7693 stop.
7694
7695 @itemize @bullet
7696 @item
7697 @value{GDBN} displays source code through Emacs.
7698 @end itemize
7699
7700 Each time @value{GDBN} displays a stack frame, Emacs automatically finds the
7701 source file for that frame and puts an arrow (@samp{=>}) at the
7702 left margin of the current line. Emacs uses a separate buffer for
7703 source display, and splits the screen to show both your @value{GDBN} session
7704 and the source.
7705
7706 Explicit @value{GDBN} @code{list} or search commands still produce output as
7707 usual, but you probably will have no reason to use them.
7708
7709 @quotation
7710 @emph{Warning:} If the directory where your program resides is not your
7711 current directory, it can be easy to confuse Emacs about the location of
7712 the source files, in which case the auxiliary display buffer will not
7713 appear to show your source. @value{GDBN} can find programs by searching your
7714 environment's @code{PATH} variable, so the @value{GDBN} input and output
7715 session will proceed normally; but Emacs does not get enough information
7716 back from @value{GDBN} to locate the source files in this situation. To
7717 avoid this problem, either start @value{GDBN} mode from the directory where
7718 your program resides, or specify a full path name when prompted for the
7719 @kbd{M-x gdb} argument.
7720
7721 A similar confusion can result if you use the @value{GDBN} @code{file} command to
7722 switch to debugging a program in some other location, from an existing
7723 @value{GDBN} buffer in Emacs.
7724 @end quotation
7725
7726 By default, @kbd{M-x gdb} calls the program called @file{gdb}. If
7727 you need to call @value{GDBN} by a different name (for example, if you keep
7728 several configurations around, with different names) you can set the
7729 Emacs variable @code{gdb-command-name}; for example,
7730
7731 @example
7732 (setq gdb-command-name "mygdb")
7733 @end example
7734
7735 @noindent
7736 (preceded by @kbd{ESC ESC}, or typed in the @code{*scratch*} buffer, or
7737 in your @file{.emacs} file) will make Emacs call the program named
7738 ``@code{mygdb}'' instead.
7739
7740 In the @value{GDBN} I/O buffer, you can use these special Emacs commands in
7741 addition to the standard Shell mode commands:
7742
7743 @table @kbd
7744 @item C-h m
7745 Describe the features of Emacs' @value{GDBN} Mode.
7746
7747 @item M-s
7748 Execute to another source line, like the @value{GDBN} @code{step} command; also
7749 update the display window to show the current file and location.
7750
7751 @item M-n
7752 Execute to next source line in this function, skipping all function
7753 calls, like the @value{GDBN} @code{next} command. Then update the display window
7754 to show the current file and location.
7755
7756 @item M-i
7757 Execute one instruction, like the @value{GDBN} @code{stepi} command; update
7758 display window accordingly.
7759
7760 @item M-x gdb-nexti
7761 Execute to next instruction, using the @value{GDBN} @code{nexti} command; update
7762 display window accordingly.
7763
7764 @item C-c C-f
7765 Execute until exit from the selected stack frame, like the @value{GDBN}
7766 @code{finish} command.
7767
7768 @item M-c
7769 Continue execution of your program, like the @value{GDBN} @code{continue}
7770 command.
7771
7772 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-p}.
7773
7774 @item M-u
7775 Go up the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument
7776 (@pxref{Arguments, , Numeric Arguments, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}),
7777 like the @value{GDBN} @code{up} command.
7778
7779 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-u}.
7780
7781 @item M-d
7782 Go down the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument, like the
7783 @value{GDBN} @code{down} command.
7784
7785 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-d}.
7786
7787 @item C-x &
7788 Read the number where the cursor is positioned, and insert it at the end
7789 of the @value{GDBN} I/O buffer. For example, if you wish to disassemble code
7790 around an address that was displayed earlier, type @kbd{disassemble};
7791 then move the cursor to the address display, and pick up the
7792 argument for @code{disassemble} by typing @kbd{C-x &}.
7793
7794 You can customize this further by defining elements of the list
7795 @code{gdb-print-command}; once it is defined, you can format or
7796 otherwise process numbers picked up by @kbd{C-x &} before they are
7797 inserted. A numeric argument to @kbd{C-x &} will both indicate that you
7798 wish special formatting, and act as an index to pick an element of the
7799 list. If the list element is a string, the number to be inserted is
7800 formatted using the Emacs function @code{format}; otherwise the number
7801 is passed as an argument to the corresponding list element.
7802 @end table
7803
7804 In any source file, the Emacs command @kbd{C-x SPC} (@code{gdb-break})
7805 tells @value{GDBN} to set a breakpoint on the source line point is on.
7806
7807 If you accidentally delete the source-display buffer, an easy way to get
7808 it back is to type the command @code{f} in the @value{GDBN} buffer, to
7809 request a frame display; when you run under Emacs, this will recreate
7810 the source buffer if necessary to show you the context of the current
7811 frame.
7812
7813 The source files displayed in Emacs are in ordinary Emacs buffers
7814 which are visiting the source files in the usual way. You can edit
7815 the files with these buffers if you wish; but keep in mind that @value{GDBN}
7816 communicates with Emacs in terms of line numbers. If you add or
7817 delete lines from the text, the line numbers that @value{GDBN} knows will cease
7818 to correspond properly with the code.
7819
7820 @c The following dropped because Epoch is nonstandard. Reactivate
7821 @c if/when v19 does something similar. ---pesch@cygnus.com 19dec1990
7822 @ignore
7823 @kindex emacs epoch environment
7824 @kindex epoch
7825 @kindex inspect
7826
7827 Version 18 of Emacs has a built-in window system called the @code{epoch}
7828 environment. Users of this environment can use a new command,
7829 @code{inspect} which performs identically to @code{print} except that
7830 each value is printed in its own window.
7831 @end ignore
7832 @end ifclear
7833
7834 @ifset LUCID
7835 @node Energize
7836 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} with Energize
7837
7838 @cindex Energize
7839 The Energize Programming System is an integrated development environment
7840 that includes a point-and-click interface to many programming tools.
7841 When you use @value{GDBN} in this environment, you can use the standard
7842 Energize graphical interface to drive @value{GDBN}; you can also, if you
7843 choose, type @value{GDBN} commands as usual in a debugging window. Even if
7844 you use the graphical interface, the debugging window (which uses Emacs,
7845 and resembles the standard Emacs interface to @value{GDBN}) displays the
7846 equivalent commands, so that the history of your debugging session is
7847 properly reflected.
7848
7849 When Energize starts up a @value{GDBN} session, it uses one of the
7850 command-line options @samp{-energize} or @samp{-cadillac} (``cadillac''
7851 is the name of the communications protocol used by the Energize system).
7852 This option makes @value{GDBN} run as one of the tools in the Energize Tool
7853 Set: it sends all output to the Energize kernel, and accept input from
7854 it as well.
7855
7856 See the user manual for the Energize Programming System for
7857 information on how to use the Energize graphical interface and the other
7858 development tools that Energize integrates with @value{GDBN}.
7859
7860 @end ifset
7861
7862 @node GDB Bugs
7863 @chapter Reporting Bugs in @value{GDBN}
7864 @cindex bugs in @value{GDBN}
7865 @cindex reporting bugs in @value{GDBN}
7866
7867 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @value{GDBN} reliable.
7868
7869 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it
7870 may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help
7871 the entire community by making the next version of @value{GDBN} work better. Bug
7872 reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @value{GDBN}.
7873
7874 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7875 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7876
7877 @menu
7878 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7879 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7880 @end menu
7881
7882 @node Bug Criteria
7883 @section Have you found a bug?
7884 @cindex bug criteria
7885
7886 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7887
7888 @itemize @bullet
7889 @item
7890 @cindex fatal signal
7891 @cindex debugger crash
7892 @cindex crash of debugger
7893 If the debugger gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7894 @value{GDBN} bug. Reliable debuggers never crash.
7895
7896 @item
7897 @cindex error on valid input
7898 If @value{GDBN} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7899
7900 @item
7901 @cindex invalid input
7902 If @value{GDBN} does not produce an error message for invalid input,
7903 that is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of
7904 ``invalid input'' might be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support
7905 for traditional practice''.
7906
7907 @item
7908 If you are an experienced user of debugging tools, your suggestions
7909 for improvement of @value{GDBN} are welcome in any case.
7910 @end itemize
7911
7912 @node Bug Reporting
7913 @section How to report bugs
7914 @cindex bug reports
7915 @cindex @value{GDBN} bugs, reporting
7916
7917 A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
7918 If you obtained @value{GDBN} from a support organization, we recommend you
7919 contact that organization first.
7920
7921 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7922 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the GNU Emacs
7923 distribution.
7924
7925 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @value{GDBN} to one
7926 of these addresses:
7927
7928 @example
7929 bug-gdb@@prep.ai.mit.edu
7930 @{ucbvax|mit-eddie|uunet@}!prep.ai.mit.edu!bug-gdb
7931 @end example
7932
7933 @strong{Do not send bug reports to @samp{info-gdb}, or to
7934 @samp{help-gdb}, or to any newsgroups.} Most users of @value{GDBN} do not want to
7935 receive bug reports. Those that do, have arranged to receive @samp{bug-gdb}.
7936
7937 The mailing list @samp{bug-gdb} has a newsgroup @samp{gnu.gdb.bug} which
7938 serves as a repeater. The mailing list and the newsgroup carry exactly
7939 the same messages. Often people think of posting bug reports to the
7940 newsgroup instead of mailing them. This appears to work, but it has one
7941 problem which can be crucial: a newsgroup posting often lacks a mail
7942 path back to the sender. Thus, if we need to ask for more information,
7943 we may be unable to reach you. For this reason, it is better to send
7944 bug reports to the mailing list.
7945
7946 As a last resort, send bug reports on paper to:
7947
7948 @example
7949 GNU Debugger Bugs
7950 Free Software Foundation
7951 545 Tech Square
7952 Cambridge, MA 02139
7953 @end example
7954
7955 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7956 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7957 fact or leave it out, state it!
7958
7959 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7960 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7961 assume that the name of the variable you use in an example does not matter.
7962 Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a
7963 stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location where that
7964 name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were different, the contents
7965 of that location would fool the debugger into doing the right thing despite
7966 the bug. Play it safe and give a specific, complete example. That is the
7967 easiest thing for you to do, and the most helpful.
7968
7969 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7970 the bug if it is new to us. It is not as important as what happens if
7971 the bug is already known. Therefore, always write your bug reports on
7972 the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7973
7974 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7975 bell?'' Those bug reports are useless, and we urge everyone to
7976 @emph{refuse to respond to them} except to chide the sender to report
7977 bugs properly.
7978
7979 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7980
7981 @itemize @bullet
7982 @item
7983 The version of @value{GDBN}. @value{GDBN} announces it if you start with no
7984 arguments; you can also print it at any time using @code{show version}.
7985
7986 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7987 the bug in the current version of @value{GDBN}.
7988
7989 @item
7990 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7991 version number.
7992
7993 @item
7994 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @value{GDBN}---e.g.
7995 ``@value{GCC}--2.0''.
7996
7997 @item
7998 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile the program you
7999 are debugging---e.g. ``@value{GCC}--2.0''.
8000
8001 @item
8002 The command arguments you gave the compiler to compile your example and
8003 observe the bug. For example, did you use @samp{-O}? To guarantee
8004 you will not omit something important, list them all. A copy of the
8005 Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
8006
8007 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8008 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8009
8010 @item
8011 A complete input script, and all necessary source files, that will
8012 reproduce the bug.
8013
8014 @item
8015 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8016 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8017
8018 Of course, if the bug is that @value{GDBN} gets a fatal signal, then we will
8019 certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
8020 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. We are human, after all. You
8021 might as well not give us a chance to make a mistake.
8022
8023 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8024 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as,
8025 your copy of @value{GDBN} is out of synch, or you have encountered a
8026 bug in the C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy
8027 might crash and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash,
8028 then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not
8029 happening for us. If you had not told us to expect a crash, then we
8030 would not be able to draw any conclusion from our observations.
8031
8032 @item
8033 If you wish to suggest changes to the @value{GDBN} source, send us context
8034 diffs. If you even discuss something in the @value{GDBN} source, refer to
8035 it by context, not by line number.
8036
8037 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8038 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8039 @end itemize
8040
8041 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8042
8043 @itemize @bullet
8044 @item
8045 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8046
8047 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8048 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8049 changes will not affect it.
8050
8051 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8052 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8053 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8054 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8055
8056 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8057 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8058 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8059 less time, etc.
8060
8061 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8062 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8063
8064 @item
8065 A patch for the bug.
8066
8067 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8068 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8069 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8070 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8071
8072 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @value{GDBN} it is very hard to
8073 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8074 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able
8075 to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8076
8077 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8078 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8079 help us to understand.
8080
8081 @item
8082 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8083
8084 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8085 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8086 @end itemize
8087
8088 @c The readline documentation is distributed with the readline code
8089 @c and consists of the two following files:
8090 @c rluser.texinfo
8091 @c inc-hist.texi
8092 @c Use -I with makeinfo to point to the appropriate directory,
8093 @c environment var TEXINPUTS with TeX.
8094 @include rluser.texinfo
8095 @include inc-hist.texi
8096
8097 @ifset NOVEL
8098 @node Renamed Commands
8099 @appendix Renamed Commands
8100
8101 The following commands were renamed in GDB 4, in order to make the
8102 command set as a whole more consistent and easier to use and remember:
8103
8104 @kindex add-syms
8105 @kindex delete environment
8106 @kindex info copying
8107 @kindex info convenience
8108 @kindex info directories
8109 @kindex info editing
8110 @kindex info history
8111 @kindex info targets
8112 @kindex info values
8113 @kindex info version
8114 @kindex info warranty
8115 @kindex set addressprint
8116 @kindex set arrayprint
8117 @kindex set prettyprint
8118 @kindex set screen-height
8119 @kindex set screen-width
8120 @kindex set unionprint
8121 @kindex set vtblprint
8122 @kindex set demangle
8123 @kindex set asm-demangle
8124 @kindex set sevenbit-strings
8125 @kindex set array-max
8126 @kindex set caution
8127 @kindex set history write
8128 @kindex show addressprint
8129 @kindex show arrayprint
8130 @kindex show prettyprint
8131 @kindex show screen-height
8132 @kindex show screen-width
8133 @kindex show unionprint
8134 @kindex show vtblprint
8135 @kindex show demangle
8136 @kindex show asm-demangle
8137 @kindex show sevenbit-strings
8138 @kindex show array-max
8139 @kindex show caution
8140 @kindex show history write
8141 @kindex unset
8142
8143 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8144 @ifinfo
8145 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8146 @example
8147 OLD COMMAND NEW COMMAND
8148 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8149 --------------- -------------------------------
8150 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8151 add-syms add-symbol-file
8152 delete environment unset environment
8153 info convenience show convenience
8154 info copying show copying
8155 info directories show directories
8156 info editing show commands
8157 info history show values
8158 info targets help target
8159 info values show values
8160 info version show version
8161 info warranty show warranty
8162 set/show addressprint set/show print address
8163 set/show array-max set/show print elements
8164 set/show arrayprint set/show print array
8165 set/show asm-demangle set/show print asm-demangle
8166 set/show caution set/show confirm
8167 set/show demangle set/show print demangle
8168 set/show history write set/show history save
8169 set/show prettyprint set/show print pretty
8170 set/show screen-height set/show height
8171 set/show screen-width set/show width
8172 set/show sevenbit-strings set/show print sevenbit-strings
8173 set/show unionprint set/show print union
8174 set/show vtblprint set/show print vtbl
8175
8176 unset [No longer an alias for delete]
8177 @end example
8178 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8179 @end ifinfo
8180
8181 @tex
8182 \vskip \parskip\vskip \baselineskip
8183 \halign{\tt #\hfil &\qquad#&\tt #\hfil\cr
8184 {\bf Old Command} &&{\bf New Command}\cr
8185 add-syms &&add-symbol-file\cr
8186 delete environment &&unset environment\cr
8187 info convenience &&show convenience\cr
8188 info copying &&show copying\cr
8189 info directories &&show directories \cr
8190 info editing &&show commands\cr
8191 info history &&show values\cr
8192 info targets &&help target\cr
8193 info values &&show values\cr
8194 info version &&show version\cr
8195 info warranty &&show warranty\cr
8196 set{\rm / }show addressprint &&set{\rm / }show print address\cr
8197 set{\rm / }show array-max &&set{\rm / }show print elements\cr
8198 set{\rm / }show arrayprint &&set{\rm / }show print array\cr
8199 set{\rm / }show asm-demangle &&set{\rm / }show print asm-demangle\cr
8200 set{\rm / }show caution &&set{\rm / }show confirm\cr
8201 set{\rm / }show demangle &&set{\rm / }show print demangle\cr
8202 set{\rm / }show history write &&set{\rm / }show history save\cr
8203 set{\rm / }show prettyprint &&set{\rm / }show print pretty\cr
8204 set{\rm / }show screen-height &&set{\rm / }show height\cr
8205 set{\rm / }show screen-width &&set{\rm / }show width\cr
8206 set{\rm / }show sevenbit-strings &&set{\rm / }show print sevenbit-strings\cr
8207 set{\rm / }show unionprint &&set{\rm / }show print union\cr
8208 set{\rm / }show vtblprint &&set{\rm / }show print vtbl\cr
8209 \cr
8210 unset &&\rm(No longer an alias for delete)\cr
8211 }
8212 @end tex
8213 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8214 @end ifset
8215
8216 @ifclear PRECONFIGURED
8217 @node Formatting Documentation
8218 @appendix Formatting Documentation
8219
8220 @cindex GDB reference card
8221 @cindex reference card
8222 The GDB 4 release includes an already-formatted reference card, ready
8223 for printing with PostScript or GhostScript, in the @file{gdb}
8224 subdirectory of the main source directory@footnote{In
8225 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb/refcard.ps} of the version @value{GDBVN}
8226 release.}. If you can use PostScript or GhostScript with your printer,
8227 you can print the reference card immediately with @file{refcard.ps}.
8228
8229 The release also includes the source for the reference card. You
8230 can format it, using @TeX{}, by typing:
8231
8232 @example
8233 make refcard.dvi
8234 @end example
8235
8236 The GDB reference card is designed to print in landscape mode on US
8237 ``letter'' size paper; that is, on a sheet 11 inches wide by 8.5 inches
8238 high. You will need to specify this form of printing as an option to
8239 your @sc{dvi} output program.
8240
8241 @cindex documentation
8242
8243 All the documentation for GDB comes as part of the machine-readable
8244 distribution. The documentation is written in Texinfo format, which is
8245 a documentation system that uses a single source file to produce both
8246 on-line information and a printed manual. You can use one of the Info
8247 formatting commands to create the on-line version of the documentation
8248 and @TeX{} (or @code{texi2roff}) to typeset the printed version.
8249
8250 GDB includes an already formatted copy of the on-line Info version of
8251 this manual in the @file{gdb} subdirectory. The main Info file is
8252 @file{gdb-@var{version-number}/gdb/gdb.info}, and it refers to
8253 subordinate files matching @samp{gdb.info*} in the same directory. If
8254 necessary, you can print out these files, or read them with any editor;
8255 but they are easier to read using the @code{info} subsystem in GNU Emacs
8256 or the standalone @code{info} program, available as part of the GNU
8257 Texinfo distribution.
8258
8259 If you want to format these Info files yourself, you need one of the
8260 Info formatting programs, such as @code{texinfo-format-buffer} or
8261 @code{makeinfo}.
8262
8263 If you have @code{makeinfo} installed, and are in the top level GDB
8264 source directory (@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}}, in the case of version @value{GDBVN}), you can
8265 make the Info file by typing:
8266
8267 @example
8268 cd gdb
8269 make gdb.info
8270 @end example
8271
8272 If you want to typeset and print copies of this manual, you need @TeX{},
8273 a program to print its @sc{dvi} output files, and @file{texinfo.tex}, the
8274 Texinfo definitions file.
8275
8276 @TeX{} is a typesetting program; it does not print files directly, but
8277 produces output files called @sc{dvi} files. To print a typeset
8278 document, you need a program to print @sc{dvi} files. If your system
8279 has @TeX{} installed, chances are it has such a program. The precise
8280 command to use depends on your system; @kbd{lpr -d} is common; another
8281 (for PostScript devices) is @kbd{dvips}. The @sc{dvi} print command may
8282 require a file name without any extension or a @samp{.dvi} extension.
8283
8284 @TeX{} also requires a macro definitions file called
8285 @file{texinfo.tex}. This file tells @TeX{} how to typeset a document
8286 written in Texinfo format. On its own, @TeX{} cannot read, much less
8287 typeset a Texinfo file. @file{texinfo.tex} is distributed with GDB
8288 and is located in the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}/texinfo}
8289 directory.
8290
8291 If you have @TeX{} and a @sc{dvi} printer program installed, you can
8292 typeset and print this manual. First switch to the the @file{gdb}
8293 subdirectory of the main source directory (for example, to
8294 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb}) and then type:
8295
8296 @example
8297 make gdb.dvi
8298 @end example
8299
8300 @node Installing GDB
8301 @appendix Installing GDB
8302 @cindex configuring GDB
8303 @cindex installation
8304
8305 GDB comes with a @code{configure} script that automates the process
8306 of preparing GDB for installation; you can then use @code{make} to
8307 build the @code{gdb} program.
8308 @iftex
8309 @c irrelevant in info file; it's as current as the code it lives with.
8310 @footnote{If you have a more recent version of GDB than @value{GDBVN},
8311 look at the @file{README} file in the sources; we may have improved the
8312 installation procedures since publishing this manual.}
8313 @end iftex
8314
8315 The GDB distribution includes all the source code you need for GDB in
8316 a single directory, whose name is usually composed by appending the
8317 version number to @samp{gdb}.
8318
8319 For example, the GDB version @value{GDBVN} distribution is in the
8320 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} directory. That directory contains:
8321
8322 @table @code
8323 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/configure @r{(and supporting files)}
8324 script for configuring GDB and all its supporting libraries.
8325
8326 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb
8327 the source specific to GDB itself
8328
8329 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/bfd
8330 source for the Binary File Descriptor library
8331
8332 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/include
8333 GNU include files
8334
8335 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/libiberty
8336 source for the @samp{-liberty} free software library
8337
8338 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/opcodes
8339 source for the library of opcode tables and disassemblers
8340
8341 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/readline
8342 source for the GNU command-line interface
8343
8344 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/glob
8345 source for the GNU filename pattern-matching subroutine
8346
8347 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/mmalloc
8348 source for the GNU memory-mapped malloc package
8349 @end table
8350
8351 The simplest way to configure and build GDB is to run @code{configure}
8352 from the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory, which in
8353 this example is the @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} directory.
8354
8355 First switch to the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory
8356 if you are not already in it; then run @code{configure}. Pass the
8357 identifier for the platform on which GDB will run as an
8358 argument.
8359
8360 For example:
8361
8362 @example
8363 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}
8364 ./configure @var{host}
8365 make
8366 @end example
8367
8368 @noindent
8369 where @var{host} is an identifier such as @samp{sun4} or
8370 @samp{decstation}, that identifies the platform where GDB will run.
8371 (You can often leave off @var{host}; @code{configure} tries to guess the
8372 correct value by examining your system.)
8373
8374 Running @samp{configure @var{host}} and then running @code{make} builds the
8375 @file{bfd}, @file{readline}, @file{mmalloc}, and @file{libiberty}
8376 libraries, then @code{gdb} itself. The configured source files, and the
8377 binaries, are left in the corresponding source directories.
8378
8379 @code{configure} is a Bourne-shell (@code{/bin/sh}) script; if your
8380 system does not recognize this automatically when you run a different
8381 shell, you may need to run @code{sh} on it explicitly:
8382
8383 @example
8384 sh configure @var{host}
8385 @end example
8386
8387 If you run @code{configure} from a directory that contains source
8388 directories for multiple libraries or programs, such as the
8389 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} source directory for version @value{GDBVN}, @code{configure}
8390 creates configuration files for every directory level underneath (unless
8391 you tell it not to, with the @samp{--norecursion} option).
8392
8393 You can run the @code{configure} script from any of the
8394 subordinate directories in the GDB distribution if you only want to
8395 configure that subdirectory, but be sure to specify a path to it.
8396
8397 For example, with version @value{GDBVN}, type the following to configure only
8398 the @code{bfd} subdirectory:
8399
8400 @example
8401 @group
8402 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}/bfd
8403 ../configure @var{host}
8404 @end group
8405 @end example
8406
8407 You can install @code{@value{GDBP}} anywhere; it has no hardwired paths.
8408 However, you should make sure that the shell on your path (named by
8409 the @samp{SHELL} environment variable) is publicly readable. Remember
8410 that GDB uses the shell to start your program---some systems refuse to
8411 let GDB debug child processes whose programs are not readable.
8412
8413 @menu
8414 * Separate Objdir:: Compiling GDB in another directory
8415 * Config Names:: Specifying names for hosts and targets
8416 * configure Options:: Summary of options for configure
8417 @end menu
8418
8419 @node Separate Objdir
8420 @section Compiling GDB in another directory
8421
8422 If you want to run GDB versions for several host or target machines,
8423 you need a different @code{gdb} compiled for each combination of
8424 host and target. @code{configure} is designed to make this easy by
8425 allowing you to generate each configuration in a separate subdirectory,
8426 rather than in the source directory. If your @code{make} program
8427 handles the @samp{VPATH} feature (GNU @code{make} does), running
8428 @code{make} in each of these directories builds the @code{gdb}
8429 program specified there.
8430
8431 To build @code{gdb} in a separate directory, run @code{configure}
8432 with the @samp{--srcdir} option to specify where to find the source.
8433 (You also need to specify a path to find @code{configure}
8434 itself from your working directory. If the path to @code{configure}
8435 would be the same as the argument to @samp{--srcdir}, you can leave out
8436 the @samp{--srcdir} option; it will be assumed.)
8437
8438 For example, with version @value{GDBVN}, you can build GDB in a separate
8439 directory for a Sun 4 like this:
8440
8441 @example
8442 @group
8443 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}
8444 mkdir ../gdb-sun4
8445 cd ../gdb-sun4
8446 ../gdb-@value{GDBVN}/configure sun4
8447 make
8448 @end group
8449 @end example
8450
8451 When @code{configure} builds a configuration using a remote source
8452 directory, it creates a tree for the binaries with the same structure
8453 (and using the same names) as the tree under the source directory. In
8454 the example, you'd find the Sun 4 library @file{libiberty.a} in the
8455 directory @file{gdb-sun4/libiberty}, and GDB itself in
8456 @file{gdb-sun4/gdb}.
8457
8458 One popular reason to build several GDB configurations in separate
8459 directories is to configure GDB for cross-compiling (where GDB
8460 runs on one machine---the host---while debugging programs that run on
8461 another machine---the target). You specify a cross-debugging target by
8462 giving the @samp{--target=@var{target}} option to @code{configure}.
8463
8464 When you run @code{make} to build a program or library, you must run
8465 it in a configured directory---whatever directory you were in when you
8466 called @code{configure} (or one of its subdirectories).
8467
8468 The @code{Makefile} that @code{configure} generates in each source
8469 directory also runs recursively. If you type @code{make} in a source
8470 directory such as @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} (or in a separate configured
8471 directory configured with @samp{--srcdir=@var{path}/gdb-@value{GDBVN}}), you
8472 will build all the required libraries, and then build GDB.
8473
8474 When you have multiple hosts or targets configured in separate
8475 directories, you can run @code{make} on them in parallel (for example,
8476 if they are NFS-mounted on each of the hosts); they will not interfere
8477 with each other.
8478
8479 @node Config Names
8480 @section Specifying names for hosts and targets
8481
8482 The specifications used for hosts and targets in the @code{configure}
8483 script are based on a three-part naming scheme, but some short predefined
8484 aliases are also supported. The full naming scheme encodes three pieces
8485 of information in the following pattern:
8486
8487 @example
8488 @var{architecture}-@var{vendor}-@var{os}
8489 @end example
8490
8491 For example, you can use the alias @code{sun4} as a @var{host} argument,
8492 or as the value for @var{target} in a @code{--target=@var{target}}
8493 option. The equivalent full name is @samp{sparc-sun-sunos4}.
8494
8495 The @code{configure} script accompanying GDB does not provide
8496 any query facility to list all supported host and target names or
8497 aliases. @code{configure} calls the Bourne shell script
8498 @code{config.sub} to map abbreviations to full names; you can read the
8499 script, if you wish, or you can use it to test your guesses on
8500 abbreviations---for example:
8501
8502 @smallexample
8503 % sh config.sub sun4
8504 sparc-sun-sunos4.1.1
8505 % sh config.sub sun3
8506 m68k-sun-sunos4.1.1
8507 % sh config.sub decstation
8508 mips-dec-ultrix4.2
8509 % sh config.sub hp300bsd
8510 m68k-hp-bsd
8511 % sh config.sub i386v
8512 i386-unknown-sysv
8513 % sh config.sub i786v
8514 Invalid configuration `i786v': machine `i786v' not recognized
8515 @end smallexample
8516
8517 @noindent
8518 @code{config.sub} is also distributed in the GDB source
8519 directory (@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}}, for version @value{GDBVN}).
8520
8521 @node configure Options
8522 @section @code{configure} options
8523
8524 Here is a summary of the @code{configure} options and arguments that
8525 are most often useful for building @value{GDBN}. @code{configure} also has
8526 several other options not listed here. @inforef{What Configure
8527 Does,,configure.info}, for a full explanation of @code{configure}.
8528 @c FIXME: Would this be more, or less, useful as an xref (ref to printed
8529 @c manual in the printed manual, ref to info file only from the info file)?
8530
8531 @example
8532 configure @r{[}--help@r{]}
8533 @r{[}--prefix=@var{dir}@r{]}
8534 @r{[}--srcdir=@var{path}@r{]}
8535 @r{[}--norecursion@r{]} @r{[}--rm@r{]}
8536 @r{[}--target=@var{target}@r{]} @var{host}
8537 @end example
8538
8539 @noindent
8540 You may introduce options with a single @samp{-} rather than
8541 @samp{--} if you prefer; but you may abbreviate option names if you use
8542 @samp{--}.
8543
8544 @table @code
8545 @item --help
8546 Display a quick summary of how to invoke @code{configure}.
8547
8548 @item -prefix=@var{dir}
8549 Configure the source to install programs and files under directory
8550 @file{@var{dir}}.
8551
8552 @item --srcdir=@var{path}
8553 @strong{Warning: using this option requires GNU @code{make}, or another
8554 @code{make} that implements the @code{VPATH} feature.}@*
8555 Use this option to make configurations in directories separate from the
8556 GDB source directories. Among other things, you can use this to
8557 build (or maintain) several configurations simultaneously, in separate
8558 directories. @code{configure} writes configuration specific files in
8559 the current directory, but arranges for them to use the source in the
8560 directory @var{path}. @code{configure} will create directories under
8561 the working directory in parallel to the source directories below
8562 @var{path}.
8563
8564 @item --norecursion
8565 Configure only the directory level where @code{configure} is executed; do not
8566 propagate configuration to subdirectories.
8567
8568 @item --rm
8569 @emph{Remove} files otherwise built during configuration.
8570
8571 @c This does not work (yet if ever). FIXME.
8572 @c @item --parse=@var{lang} @dots{}
8573 @c Configure the GDB expression parser to parse the listed languages.
8574 @c @samp{all} configures GDB for all supported languages. To get a
8575 @c list of all supported languages, omit the argument. Without this
8576 @c option, GDB is configured to parse all supported languages.
8577
8578 @item --target=@var{target}
8579 Configure GDB for cross-debugging programs running on the specified
8580 @var{target}. Without this option, GDB is configured to debug
8581 programs that run on the same machine (@var{host}) as GDB itself.
8582
8583 There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available targets.
8584
8585 @item @var{host} @dots{}
8586 Configure GDB to run on the specified @var{host}.
8587
8588 There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available hosts.
8589 @end table
8590
8591 @noindent
8592 @code{configure} accepts other options, for compatibility with
8593 configuring other GNU tools recursively; but these are the only
8594 options that affect GDB or its supporting libraries.
8595 @end ifclear
8596
8597 @node Index
8598 @unnumbered Index
8599
8600 @printindex cp
8601
8602 @tex
8603 % I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8604 % meantime:
8605 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8606 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8607 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8608 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8609 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8610 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/},}
8611 \centerline{{\bf\fontname\tenbf}, and}
8612 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8613 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8614 \page\colophon
8615 % Blame: pesch@cygnus.com, 1991.
8616 @end tex
8617
8618 @contents
8619 @bye
This page took 0.243683 seconds and 3 git commands to generate.